Anda di halaman 1dari 228

Ident-Nr.

48 001
Technical Reference and Operating Manual
USM 35X
Unfold this page. You will find an overview of the USM 35X function groups and operators controls.
This information will help you to quickly find your way through the operating manual.
This issue 01, 04/2005 applies to the following software versions:
USM 35X V.01.00.3x with Data Logger option: V.01.01.3x
USM 35X DAC V.01.10.3x with Data Logger option: V.01.11.3x
USM 35X S V.01.20.3x with Data Logger option: V.01.21.3x
Subject to change without notice.
Contents

First operation level


Changing the operation level:

Selecting the function group:

Selecting the function:

BASE PULS RECV aGAT bGAT


AWS or * DGS or * DAC/
Second operation level JDAC

CAL REF* TRIG MEM DATA


H Notes:
Third operation level
As a standard feature, the function
group REF can be changed over
to the function group AWS. With
the USM 35X DAC, there is also
the additional function group DAC/
JDAC; with the USM 35X S, the
function groups DAC/JDAC and
0-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 DGS are available.
Krautkramer USM 35X
MEAS MSEL LCD CFG1 CFG2 The character > after a function
indicates a double assignment.

Status symbols Key functions


Symbol Description Key Function

* Display memory is enabled (freeze),


display is stored. Switching the unit on and off
Data transfer active,
! printing or remote control Step size for gain setting
B Battery indicator; appears with low battery
charge, batteries must be charged.
Storage (freezing) of screen display
F TOF is set to flank.
P TOF is set to peak.
Enlarged echo display over the entire
J TOF is set to jflank. screen
T T-CORR (transfer correction) function is
active Printing or transferring data
R Reference echo has been recorded
A ATT-OBJ/ATT-REF function (sound Recording measured values, saving data
attenuation is active)

LED Changing the operation level


Symbol Description
A Gate alarm Selecting the function group
R Function REJECT is active
D Function DUAL (pulser-receiver
separation) is active Selecting the function
Contents

1 Introduction ........................................ 1-1 1.3 The USM 35X family .................................. 1-8
The different instrument versions ................ 1-8
1.1 Safety information ..................................... 1-2
Special features .......................................... 1-9
Batteries ...................................................... 1-2
Software ...................................................... 1-2 1.4 How to use this manual .......................... 1-10
Defects/errors and exceptional stresses ..... 1-3 1.5 Layout and presentation in this
manual ..................................................... 1-11
1.2 Important information on
ultrasonic testing ...................................... 1-3 Attention and Note symbols ...................... 1-11
Preconditions for testing with Listings ..................................................... 1-11
ultrasonic test equipment ............................ 1-3 Operating steps ......................................... 1-11
Operator training .......................................... 1-4
Technical test requirements ........................ 1-4 2 Standard package and
Limits of testing .......................................... 1-5 accessories ........................................ 2-1
Ultrasonic wall thickness measurement ...... 1-5
2.1 Standard package ..................................... 2-3
Effect of the test objects material .............. 1-5
Effect of temperature variations .................. 1-6 2.2 Recommended accessories ..................... 2-5
Measurement of remaining wall
thickness .................................................... 1-6
Ultrasonic evaluation of flaws ..................... 1-6
Flaw boundary method ................................ 1-6
Echo display comparison method ............... 1-7

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 0-1

Contents

1 Introduction ........................................ 1-1 1.3 The USM 35X family .................................. 1-8
The different instrument versions ................ 1-8
1.1 Safety information ..................................... 1-2
Special features .......................................... 1-9
Batteries ...................................................... 1-2
Software ...................................................... 1-2 1.4 How to use this manual .......................... 1-10
Defects/errors and exceptional stresses ..... 1-3 1.5 Layout and presentation in this
manual ..................................................... 1-11
1.2 Important information on
ultrasonic testing ...................................... 1-3 Attention and Note symbols ...................... 1-11
Preconditions for testing with Listings ..................................................... 1-11
ultrasonic test equipment ............................ 1-3 Operating steps ......................................... 1-11
Operator training .......................................... 1-4
Technical test requirements ........................ 1-4 2 Standard package and
Limits of testing .......................................... 1-5 accessories ........................................ 2-1
Ultrasonic wall thickness measurement ...... 1-5
2.1 Standard package ..................................... 2-3
Effect of the test objects material .............. 1-5
Effect of temperature variations .................. 1-6 2.2 Recommended accessories ..................... 2-5
Measurement of remaining wall
thickness .................................................... 1-6
Ultrasonic evaluation of flaws ..................... 1-6
Flaw boundary method ................................ 1-6
Echo display comparison method ............... 1-7

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 0-1


Contents

3 Initial start-up ...................................... 3-1 4.3 Keys and rotary knobs .............................. 4-6
Function keys ............................................. 4-6
3.1 Power supply ............................................. 3-2
On/Off key .................................................. 4-6
Operation using the power supply unit ........ 3-2
Special keys ............................................... 4-7
Operation using batteries ............................ 3-3
Rotary knobs ............................................... 4-8
Charging the batteries ................................. 3-5
4.4 Operational concept .................................. 4-8
3.2 Connecting a probe .................................. 3-7
Setting the functions ................................... 4-9
3.3 Starting the USM 35X ................................ 3-8
4.5 Important basic settings ......................... 4-10
Switching on ................................................ 3-8
Selecting the language .............................. 4-10
Reset .......................................................... 3-8
Selecting units .......................................... 4-11
Information lines in the startup screen ........ 3-8
Setting the date ......................................... 4-12
Setting the time ......................................... 4-13
4 Principles of operation ...................... 4-1
4.6 Basic settings of the display .................. 4-14
4.1 Operators controls ................................... 4-2
Selecting the color scheme ....................... 4-14
4.2 Screen display ........................................... 4-3 Setting the lighting .................................... 4-14
Functions on the display ............................. 4-4
Other displays ............................................. 4-5

0-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Contents

3 Initial start-up ...................................... 3-1 4.3 Keys and rotary knobs .............................. 4-6
Function keys ............................................. 4-6
3.1 Power supply ............................................. 3-2
On/Off key .................................................. 4-6
Operation using the power supply unit ........ 3-2
Special keys ............................................... 4-7
Operation using batteries ............................ 3-3
Rotary knobs ............................................... 4-8
Charging the batteries ................................. 3-5
4.4 Operational concept .................................. 4-8
3.2 Connecting a probe .................................. 3-7
Setting the functions ................................... 4-9
3.3 Starting the USM 35X ................................ 3-8
4.5 Important basic settings ......................... 4-10
Switching on ................................................ 3-8
Selecting the language .............................. 4-10
Reset .......................................................... 3-8
Selecting units .......................................... 4-11
Information lines in the startup screen ........ 3-8
Setting the date ......................................... 4-12
Setting the time ......................................... 4-13
4 Principles of operation ...................... 4-1
4.6 Basic settings of the display .................. 4-14
4.1 Operators controls ................................... 4-2
Selecting the color scheme ....................... 4-14
4.2 Screen display ........................................... 4-3 Setting the lighting .................................... 4-14
Functions on the display ............................. 4-4
Other displays ............................................. 4-5

0-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Contents

5 Operation ............................................ 5-1 5.5 Adjusting the receiver


(function group RECV) ............................ 5-11
5.1 Overview of the functions ......................... 5-2 FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain) ............. 5-12
Function groups first operating level ........... 5-3 dBSTEP .................................................... 5-12
Function groups second operating level ...... 5-3 REJECT .................................................... 5-12
Function groups third operating level .......... 5-4 FREQU (Frequency range) ........................ 5-13
5.2 Setting the gain ......................................... 5-5 RECTIFY (Rectification) ............................ 5-13
Defining the dB incrementation for gain ...... 5-5 5.6 Setting the gates
5.3 Adjusting the display range (function groups aGAT and bGAT) ......... 5-14
(function group BASE) .............................. 5-6 Tasks of the gates ..................................... 5-14
RANGE (Display range) .............................. 5-6 aLOGIC/bLOGIC (Evaluation logic of
MTLVEL (Sound velocity) ........................... 5-7 the gates) .................................................. 5-15
D-DELAY (Display starting point) ................ 5-7 aSTART/bSTART (Starting points of
the gates) .................................................. 5-16
P-DELAY (Probe delay) ............................... 5-8
aWIDTH/bWIDTH (Width of the gates) ...... 5-16
5.4 Adjusting the pulser aTHRSH/bTHRSH (Response and
(function group PULS) .............................. 5-9 measurement threshold of the gates) ........ 5-16
DAMPING (Probe matching) ....................... 5-9
POWER (Intensity) ................................... 5-10
DUAL (Pulser-receiver separation) ............ 5-10
PRF-MOD (Pulse repetition frequency) ..... 5-11

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 0-3

Contents

5 Operation ............................................ 5-1 5.5 Adjusting the receiver


(function group RECV) ............................ 5-11
5.1 Overview of the functions ......................... 5-2 FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain) ............. 5-12
Function groups first operating level ........... 5-3 dBSTEP .................................................... 5-12
Function groups second operating level ...... 5-3 REJECT .................................................... 5-12
Function groups third operating level .......... 5-4 FREQU (Frequency range) ........................ 5-13
5.2 Setting the gain ......................................... 5-5 RECTIFY (Rectification) ............................ 5-13
Defining the dB incrementation for gain ...... 5-5 5.6 Setting the gates
5.3 Adjusting the display range (function groups aGAT and bGAT) ......... 5-14
(function group BASE) .............................. 5-6 Tasks of the gates ..................................... 5-14
RANGE (Display range) .............................. 5-6 aLOGIC/bLOGIC (Evaluation logic of
MTLVEL (Sound velocity) ........................... 5-7 the gates) .................................................. 5-15
D-DELAY (Display starting point) ................ 5-7 aSTART/bSTART (Starting points of
the gates) .................................................. 5-16
P-DELAY (Probe delay) ............................... 5-8
aWIDTH/bWIDTH (Width of the gates) ...... 5-16
5.4 Adjusting the pulser aTHRSH/bTHRSH (Response and
(function group PULS) .............................. 5-9 measurement threshold of the gates) ........ 5-16
DAMPING (Probe matching) ....................... 5-9
POWER (Intensity) ................................... 5-10
DUAL (Pulser-receiver separation) ............ 5-10
PRF-MOD (Pulse repetition frequency) ..... 5-11

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 0-3


Contents

5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X ......................... 5-17 ANGLE (Angle of incidence) ................... 5-32
Calibrating the display range ..................... 5-17 X-VALUE (X-value of the probe) ................ 5-32
Choosing the measuring point ................... 5-17 COLOR ..................................................... 5-33
Calibration with straight- and THICKNE (Material thickness) .................. 5-33
angle-beam probes .................................... 5-18 DIAMET (Outside diameter of the test
Calibration with dual-element (TR) object) ....................................................... 5-33
probes ....................................................... 5-21
5.12 Data saving
5.8 Measuring ................................................ 5-23 (function group MEM) ............................. 5-34
General notes ............................................ 5-23 Storing a data set ...................................... 5-35
Deleting a data set .................................... 5-35
5.9 Measurement of dB difference
(function group REF) .............................. 5-25 Deleting all data set .................................. 5-36
Recording a reference echo ...................... 5-26 Recalling a stored data set ....................... 5-36
Deleting a reference echo ......................... 5-26 5.13 Dataset management
Echo comparison ...................................... 5-27 (function group DATA) ............................. 5-38
TESTINF (Storing additional
5.10 Classification of welds
information) ............................................... 5-39
(function group AWS) .............................. 5-28
PREVIEW (Dataset preview) .................... 5-41
Rating of welds according to AWS ............ 5-28
DIR (Dataset directory) ............................. 5-42
5.11 Calculation of flaw position SETTING (Function list) ............................ 5-42
(function group TRIG) ............................. 5-31

0-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Contents

5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X ......................... 5-17 ANGLE (Angle of incidence) ................... 5-32
Calibrating the display range ..................... 5-17 X-VALUE (X-value of the probe) ................ 5-32
Choosing the measuring point ................... 5-17 COLOR ..................................................... 5-33
Calibration with straight- and THICKNE (Material thickness) .................. 5-33
angle-beam probes .................................... 5-18 DIAMET (Outside diameter of the test
Calibration with dual-element (TR) object) ....................................................... 5-33
probes ....................................................... 5-21
5.12 Data saving
5.8 Measuring ................................................ 5-23 (function group MEM) ............................. 5-34
General notes ............................................ 5-23 Storing a data set ...................................... 5-35
Deleting a data set .................................... 5-35
5.9 Measurement of dB difference
(function group REF) .............................. 5-25 Deleting all data set .................................. 5-36
Recording a reference echo ...................... 5-26 Recalling a stored data set ....................... 5-36
Deleting a reference echo ......................... 5-26 5.13 Dataset management
Echo comparison ...................................... 5-27 (function group DATA) ............................. 5-38
TESTINF (Storing additional
5.10 Classification of welds
information) ............................................... 5-39
(function group AWS) .............................. 5-28
PREVIEW (Dataset preview) .................... 5-41
Rating of welds according to AWS ............ 5-28
DIR (Dataset directory) ............................. 5-42
5.11 Calculation of flaw position SETTING (Function list) ............................ 5-42
(function group TRIG) ............................. 5-31

0-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Contents

5.14 Configuring the USM 35X for a test TIME/DATE (Setting the time and date) .... 5-56
application ............................................... 5-43 ANAMOD .................................................. 5-57
TOF (Selecting the measuring point) ......... 5-44 HORN ........................................................ 5-58
S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading) ......... 5-46 EVAMOD (Echo evaluation) ...................... 5-58
MAGNIFY (Gate spreading) ...................... 5-48
5.16 Other functions with special keys .......... 5-59
A-Scan (Setting the A-scan) ..................... 5-48
Freeze ....................................................... 5-59
Configuring the measurement line ............. 5-49
Zooming the echo display ......................... 5-59
Setting the display .................................... 5-50
FILLED (Echo display mode) .................... 5-51 The key ............................................... 5-59
VGA .......................................................... 5-51 5.17 Status symbols and LEDs ...................... 5-60
SCHEME .................................................. 5-51 Status symbols ......................................... 5-60
LIGHT (LCD backlight) .............................. 5-52 LEDs ......................................................... 5-60
SCALE (Configuring the measurement
line) ........................................................... 5-52 5.18 Distance-amplitude curve
(only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) ........ 5-61
5.15 General configuration ............................. 5-53 DACMOD (Activating DAC/TCG) ............... 5-62
DIALOG (Selecting the language) ............. 5-53 DACECHO (Recording reference curve) .... 5-63
UNIT (Selecting units of measurement) .... 5-54 T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) ................ 5-64
BAUD-R (Baud rate for transmission) ........ 5-55 OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ......... 5-65
PRINTER (Printer for test report) .............. 5-55 Echo evaluation with DAC ......................... 5-65
COPYMOD (Assignment of the key) ... 5-55

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 0-5

Contents

5.14 Configuring the USM 35X for a test TIME/DATE (Setting the time and date) .... 5-56
application ............................................... 5-43 ANAMOD .................................................. 5-57
TOF (Selecting the measuring point) ......... 5-44 HORN ........................................................ 5-58
S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading) ......... 5-46 EVAMOD (Echo evaluation) ...................... 5-58
MAGNIFY (Gate spreading) ...................... 5-48
5.16 Other functions with special keys .......... 5-59
A-Scan (Setting the A-scan) ..................... 5-48
Freeze ....................................................... 5-59
Configuring the measurement line ............. 5-49
Zooming the echo display ......................... 5-59
Setting the display .................................... 5-50
FILLED (Echo display mode) .................... 5-51 The key ............................................... 5-59
VGA .......................................................... 5-51 5.17 Status symbols and LEDs ...................... 5-60
SCHEME .................................................. 5-51 Status symbols ......................................... 5-60
LIGHT (LCD backlight) .............................. 5-52 LEDs ......................................................... 5-60
SCALE (Configuring the measurement
line) ........................................................... 5-52 5.18 Distance-amplitude curve
(only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) ........ 5-61
5.15 General configuration ............................. 5-53 DACMOD (Activating DAC/TCG) ............... 5-62
DIALOG (Selecting the language) ............. 5-53 DACECHO (Recording reference curve) .... 5-63
UNIT (Selecting units of measurement) .... 5-54 T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) ................ 5-64
BAUD-R (Baud rate for transmission) ........ 5-55 OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ......... 5-65
PRINTER (Printer for test report) .............. 5-55 Echo evaluation with DAC ......................... 5-65
COPYMOD (Assignment of the key) ... 5-55

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 0-5


Contents

5.19 Distance-amplitude curve according Locks, error messages ............................. 5-81


to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC Validity of the DGS method ....................... 5-81
and USM 35S) .......................................... 5-66
DACMOD (Activating DAC according
to JIS) ....................................................... 5-67
6 Documentation .................................. 6-1
DACECHO (Recording reference curve) .... 5-68 6.1 Printing data .............................................. 6-2
BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve) .... 5-70 Preparing the printer .................................... 6-2
T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) ................ 5-70 Preparing the USM 35X .............................. 6-2
OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ......... 5-70 Printing ........................................................ 6-3
Echo evaluation with DAC ......................... 5-71
6.2 Documentation with UltraDOC ................. 6-4
5.20 Evaluation according to the DGS
method (only USM 35X S) ...................... 5-71 7 Maintenance and care ....................... 7-1
Measuring with DGS ................................. 5-71
Selecting the DGS mode .......................... 5-73 7.1 Care of the instrument .............................. 7-2
Default settings for the DGS 7.2 Care of the batteries .................................. 7-3
measurement ............................................ 5-73 Care of the batteries .................................... 7-3
Recording the reference echo and Charging the batteries ................................. 7-3
displaying the DGS curve ......................... 5-75
How to handle alkaline batteries .................. 7-4
Evaluation of reflectors ............................. 5-76
Transfer correction ..................................... 5-78 7.3 Maintenance .............................................. 7-5
Sound attenuation ..................................... 5-78

0-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Contents

5.19 Distance-amplitude curve according Locks, error messages ............................. 5-81


to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC Validity of the DGS method ....................... 5-81
and USM 35S) .......................................... 5-66
DACMOD (Activating DAC according
to JIS) ....................................................... 5-67
6 Documentation .................................. 6-1
DACECHO (Recording reference curve) .... 5-68 6.1 Printing data .............................................. 6-2
BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve) .... 5-70 Preparing the printer .................................... 6-2
T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) ................ 5-70 Preparing the USM 35X .............................. 6-2
OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ......... 5-70 Printing ........................................................ 6-3
Echo evaluation with DAC ......................... 5-71
6.2 Documentation with UltraDOC ................. 6-4
5.20 Evaluation according to the DGS
method (only USM 35X S) ...................... 5-71 7 Maintenance and care ....................... 7-1
Measuring with DGS ................................. 5-71
Selecting the DGS mode .......................... 5-73 7.1 Care of the instrument .............................. 7-2
Default settings for the DGS 7.2 Care of the batteries .................................. 7-3
measurement ............................................ 5-73 Care of the batteries .................................... 7-3
Recording the reference echo and Charging the batteries ................................. 7-3
displaying the DGS curve ......................... 5-75
How to handle alkaline batteries .................. 7-4
Evaluation of reflectors ............................. 5-76
Transfer correction ..................................... 5-78 7.3 Maintenance .............................................. 7-5
Sound attenuation ..................................... 5-78

0-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Contents

7.4 Recycling ................................................... 7-6 8.6 Remote control .......................................... 8-9


General view of the device .......................... 7-6 Syntax and timing ..................................... 8-11
Materials for separate disposal ................... 7-8 Functions and remote control codes ......... 8-17
Further materials and components ........... 7-10 Other remote control codes ....................... 8-24
Recycling data of master device ............... 7-12 Control codes for the rotary knobs/
function keys ............................................ 8-26
8 Interfaces and peripherals ................ 8-1
9 Appendix ............................................ 9-1
8.1 Interfaces ................................................... 8-2
9.1 Function directory ..................................... 9-2
8.2 I/O interface ............................................... 8-4
Contact assignment of the 9.2 EC declaration of conformity ................... 9-7
LEMO-1-B socket ....................................... 8-5
9.3 Manufacturer/Service addresses .............. 9-8
8.3 RS 232 interface ........................................ 8-6
9.4 Spare parts list ........................................ 9-10
Contact assignment of the Sub-D socket ... 8-6

8.4 RGB interface ............................................. 8-7 10 Changes ........................................... 10-1


8.5 Data exchange ........................................... 8-8
Connecting a printer or a PC ....................... 8-8 11 Index ................................................. 11-1
Activation of serial communication ............. 8-8
Printing data ................................................ 8-9 Technical Specifications
according to EN 12668-1
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 0-7

Contents

7.4 Recycling ................................................... 7-6 8.6 Remote control .......................................... 8-9


General view of the device .......................... 7-6 Syntax and timing ..................................... 8-11
Materials for separate disposal ................... 7-8 Functions and remote control codes ......... 8-17
Further materials and components ........... 7-10 Other remote control codes ....................... 8-24
Recycling data of master device ............... 7-12 Control codes for the rotary knobs/
function keys ............................................ 8-26
8 Interfaces and peripherals ................ 8-1
9 Appendix ............................................ 9-1
8.1 Interfaces ................................................... 8-2
9.1 Function directory ..................................... 9-2
8.2 I/O interface ............................................... 8-4
Contact assignment of the 9.2 EC declaration of conformity ................... 9-7
LEMO-1-B socket ....................................... 8-5
9.3 Manufacturer/Service addresses .............. 9-8
8.3 RS 232 interface ........................................ 8-6
9.4 Spare parts list ........................................ 9-10
Contact assignment of the Sub-D socket ... 8-6

8.4 RGB interface ............................................. 8-7 10 Changes ........................................... 10-1


8.5 Data exchange ........................................... 8-8
Connecting a printer or a PC ....................... 8-8 11 Index ................................................. 11-1
Activation of serial communication ............. 8-8
Printing data ................................................ 8-9 Technical Specifications
according to EN 12668-1
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 0-7
0-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

0-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Introduction 1

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-1

Introduction 1

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-1


Introduction Safety information

1.1 Safety information Batteries


For the battery operation of the USM 35X, we recom-
The USM 35X has been designed and tested according mend the use of a lithium-ion battery. The operation
to DIN EN 61 010 Part 1, 2002, Safety requirements for using alkaline batteries, NiMH or NiCad cells is likewise
electrical measuring, control and lab equipment, and possible. You should only use the products recom-
was technically in perfectly safe and faultless condition mended by us for the battery operation.
when leaving the manufacturing works.
You can charge the lithium-ion battery within the instru-
In order to maintain this condition and to ensure a safe ment itself or in an external battery charger. If you want
operation, you should urgently read the following safety to use NiMH or NiCad cells, you have to charge them in
information before putting the instrument into operation. an external battery charger.

As soon as you connect the power supply unit to the


A Attention: USM 35X, the battery power supply is interrupted. If a
The USM 35X is an instrument for materials testing. lithium-ion battery is inserted, the charging process
Any use for medical applications or other purposes starts automatically when you connect the instrument
is not allowed! to the mains supply. Please refer to chapter 3.1 on
power supply, and to chapter 7 on how to handle
The USM 35X may only be used in industrial envi- batteries.
ronments!

The USM 35X is waterproof according to IP 66. The Software


USM 35X can be operated with batteries or a power
supply unit. According to the current state of the art, software is
never completely free from errors. Before using any
The power supply unit has the electrical safety class II. software-controlled test equipment, please make sure

1-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Introduction Safety information

1.1 Safety information Batteries


For the battery operation of the USM 35X, we recom-
The USM 35X has been designed and tested according mend the use of a lithium-ion battery. The operation
to DIN EN 61 010 Part 1, 2002, Safety requirements for using alkaline batteries, NiMH or NiCad cells is likewise
electrical measuring, control and lab equipment, and possible. You should only use the products recom-
was technically in perfectly safe and faultless condition mended by us for the battery operation.
when leaving the manufacturing works.
You can charge the lithium-ion battery within the instru-
In order to maintain this condition and to ensure a safe ment itself or in an external battery charger. If you want
operation, you should urgently read the following safety to use NiMH or NiCad cells, you have to charge them in
information before putting the instrument into operation. an external battery charger.

As soon as you connect the power supply unit to the


A Attention: USM 35X, the battery power supply is interrupted. If a
The USM 35X is an instrument for materials testing. lithium-ion battery is inserted, the charging process
Any use for medical applications or other purposes starts automatically when you connect the instrument
is not allowed! to the mains supply. Please refer to chapter 3.1 on
power supply, and to chapter 7 on how to handle
The USM 35X may only be used in industrial envi- batteries.
ronments!

The USM 35X is waterproof according to IP 66. The Software


USM 35X can be operated with batteries or a power
supply unit. According to the current state of the art, software is
never completely free from errors. Before using any
The power supply unit has the electrical safety class II. software-controlled test equipment, please make sure

1-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Safety information Introduction

that the required functions operate perfectly in the in- 1.2 Important information on
tended combination.
ultrasonic testing
If you have any questions about the use of your test
equipment, please contact your nearest representative Please read the following information before using your
of GE Inspection Technologies. USM 35X. It is important that you understand and ob-
serve this information to avoid any operator errors that
Defects/errors and exceptional stresses might lead to false test results. This could result in per-
sonal injuries or damages to property.
If you have reason to believe that a safe operation of
your USM 35X is no longer possible, you have to dis-
connect the instrument and secure it against uninten- Preconditions for testing with ultrasonic
tional reconnection. Remove the batteries if necessary. test equipment
A safe operation is e.g. no longer possible This operating manual contains essential information on
how to operate your test equipment. In addition, there
if the instrument shows visible damages, are a number of factors which affect the test results. A
if the instrument no longer operates perfectly, description of these factors would go beyond the scope
of an operating manual. The following list therefore only
after prolonged storage under adverse conditions mentions the three most important conditions for a safe
(e.g. exceptional temperatures and/or especially high and reliable ultrasonic inspection:
air humidity, or corrosive environmental conditions),
the operator training
after being subjected to heavy stresses during trans-
portation. the knowledge of special technical test requirements
and limits
the choice of appropriate test equipment.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-3

Safety information Introduction

that the required functions operate perfectly in the in- 1.2 Important information on
tended combination.
ultrasonic testing
If you have any questions about the use of your test
equipment, please contact your nearest representative Please read the following information before using your
of GE Inspection Technologies. USM 35X. It is important that you understand and ob-
serve this information to avoid any operator errors that
Defects/errors and exceptional stresses might lead to false test results. This could result in per-
sonal injuries or damages to property.
If you have reason to believe that a safe operation of
your USM 35X is no longer possible, you have to dis-
connect the instrument and secure it against uninten- Preconditions for testing with ultrasonic
tional reconnection. Remove the batteries if necessary. test equipment
A safe operation is e.g. no longer possible This operating manual contains essential information on
how to operate your test equipment. In addition, there
if the instrument shows visible damages, are a number of factors which affect the test results. A
if the instrument no longer operates perfectly, description of these factors would go beyond the scope
of an operating manual. The following list therefore only
after prolonged storage under adverse conditions mentions the three most important conditions for a safe
(e.g. exceptional temperatures and/or especially high and reliable ultrasonic inspection:
air humidity, or corrosive environmental conditions),
the operator training
after being subjected to heavy stresses during trans-
portation. the knowledge of special technical test requirements
and limits
the choice of appropriate test equipment.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-3


Introduction Important information on ultrasonic testing

Operator training Technical test requirements


The operation of an ultrasonic test device requires a Every ultrasonic test is subject to specific technical
proper training in ultrasonic test methods. test requirements. The most important ones are:

A proper training comprises for example adequate the definition of the scope of inspection
knowledge of: the choice of the appropriate test method
the theory of sound propagation the consideration of material properties
the effects of sound velocity in the test material the determination of limits for recording and
the behavior of the sound wave at interfaces be- evaluation.
tween different materials It is the task of those with overall responsibility for test-
the propagation of the sound beam ing to ensure that the inspector is fully informed about
these requirements. The best basis for such information
the influence of sound attenuation in the test object is experience with identical test objects. It is also es-
and the influence of surface quality of the test ob- sential that the relevant test specifications be clearly
ject. and completely understood by the inspector.
Lack of such knowledge could lead to false test results
with unforeseeable consequences. You can contact for GE Inspection Technologies regularly holds specialized
example NDT societies or organizations in your country training courses in the field of ultrasonic testing. The
(DGZfP in Germany; ASNT in the USA), or also GE scheduled dates for these courses will be given to you
Inspection Technologies, for information concerning on request.
existing possibilities for the training of ultrasonic in-
spectors as well as on the qualifications and certifi-
cates that can finally be obtained.

1-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Introduction Important information on ultrasonic testing

Operator training Technical test requirements


The operation of an ultrasonic test device requires a Every ultrasonic test is subject to specific technical
proper training in ultrasonic test methods. test requirements. The most important ones are:

A proper training comprises for example adequate the definition of the scope of inspection
knowledge of: the choice of the appropriate test method
the theory of sound propagation the consideration of material properties
the effects of sound velocity in the test material the determination of limits for recording and
the behavior of the sound wave at interfaces be- evaluation.
tween different materials It is the task of those with overall responsibility for test-
the propagation of the sound beam ing to ensure that the inspector is fully informed about
these requirements. The best basis for such information
the influence of sound attenuation in the test object is experience with identical test objects. It is also es-
and the influence of surface quality of the test ob- sential that the relevant test specifications be clearly
ject. and completely understood by the inspector.
Lack of such knowledge could lead to false test results
with unforeseeable consequences. You can contact for GE Inspection Technologies regularly holds specialized
example NDT societies or organizations in your country training courses in the field of ultrasonic testing. The
(DGZfP in Germany; ASNT in the USA), or also GE scheduled dates for these courses will be given to you
Inspection Technologies, for information concerning on request.
existing possibilities for the training of ultrasonic in-
spectors as well as on the qualifications and certifi-
cates that can finally be obtained.

1-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Important information on ultrasonic testing Introduction

Limits of testing varying alloying constituents, this condition is mostly


fulfilled. The variation in sound velocity is so slight that
The information obtained from ultrasonic tests only it is only of importance for high-precision measure-
refers to those parts of the test object which are ments. In other materials, e.g. nonferrous metals or
covered by the sound beam of the probe used. plastics, the sound velocity variations may be even
Any conclusions from the tested parts to be applied to larger and thus affect the measuring accuracy.
the untested parts of the test object should be made
with extreme caution. Effect of the test objects material
Such conclusions are generally only possible in cases If the test objects material is not homogeneous, the
where extensive experience and proven methods of sound may propagate at different sound velocities in
statistical data acquisition are available. different parts of the test objects. An average sound
velocity should then be taken into account for the range
The sound beam can be completely reflected from calibration. This is achieved by means of a reference
boundary surfaces within the test object so that flaws block whose sound velocity corresponds to the average
and reflection points lying deeper remain undetected. It sound velocity of the test object.
is therefore important to make sure that all areas to be
tested in the test object are covered by the sound beam. If substantial sound velocity variations are to be ex-
pected, then the instrument calibration should be read-
justed to the actual sound velocity values at shorter
Ultrasonic wall thickness measurement time intervals. Failure to do so may lead to false thick-
All ultrasonic wall thickness measurements are based ness readings.
on a time-of-flight measurement. Accurate measure-
ment results require a constant sound velocity in the
test object. In test objects made of steel, even with

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-5

Important information on ultrasonic testing Introduction

Limits of testing varying alloying constituents, this condition is mostly


fulfilled. The variation in sound velocity is so slight that
The information obtained from ultrasonic tests only it is only of importance for high-precision measure-
refers to those parts of the test object which are ments. In other materials, e.g. nonferrous metals or
covered by the sound beam of the probe used. plastics, the sound velocity variations may be even
Any conclusions from the tested parts to be applied to larger and thus affect the measuring accuracy.
the untested parts of the test object should be made
with extreme caution. Effect of the test objects material
Such conclusions are generally only possible in cases If the test objects material is not homogeneous, the
where extensive experience and proven methods of sound may propagate at different sound velocities in
statistical data acquisition are available. different parts of the test objects. An average sound
velocity should then be taken into account for the range
The sound beam can be completely reflected from calibration. This is achieved by means of a reference
boundary surfaces within the test object so that flaws block whose sound velocity corresponds to the average
and reflection points lying deeper remain undetected. It sound velocity of the test object.
is therefore important to make sure that all areas to be
tested in the test object are covered by the sound beam. If substantial sound velocity variations are to be ex-
pected, then the instrument calibration should be read-
justed to the actual sound velocity values at shorter
Ultrasonic wall thickness measurement time intervals. Failure to do so may lead to false thick-
All ultrasonic wall thickness measurements are based ness readings.
on a time-of-flight measurement. Accurate measure-
ment results require a constant sound velocity in the
test object. In test objects made of steel, even with

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-5


Introduction Important information on ultrasonic testing

Effect of temperature variations Ultrasonic evaluation of flaws


The sound velocity within the test object also varies as In present-day test practice, there are basically two
a function of the materials temperature. This can cause different methods of flaw evaluation:
appreciable errors in measurements if the instrument
has been calibrated on a cold reference block and is If the diameter of the sound beam is smaller than the
then used on a warm or hot test object. Such measure- extent of the flaw, then the beam can be used to ex-
ment errors can be avoided either by warming the refer- plore the boundaries of the flaw and thus determine its
ence block to the same temperature before calibrating, area.
or by using a correction factor obtained from tables.
If, however, the diameter of the sound beam is larger
than the size of the flaw, the maximum echo response
Measurement of remaining wall thickness from the flaw must be compared with the maximum
echo response from an artificial flaw provided for com-
The measurement of the remaining wall thickness on parison purposes.
plant components, e.g. pipes, tanks and reaction ves-
sels of all types which are corroded or eroded from the
inside, requires a perfectly suitable gauge and special Flaw boundary method
care in handling the probe.
The smaller the diameter of the probes sound beam,
The inspectors should always be informed about the the more accurately the boundaries (and therefore the
corresponding nominal wall thicknesses and the likely flaw area) can be determined by the flaw boundary
amount of wall thickness losses. method. If, however, the sound beam is relatively
broad, the flaw area determined can substantially differ
from the actual flaw area. Care should therefore be
taken to select a probe which will give a sufficiently
narrow beam at the position of the flaw.

1-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Introduction Important information on ultrasonic testing

Effect of temperature variations Ultrasonic evaluation of flaws


The sound velocity within the test object also varies as In present-day test practice, there are basically two
a function of the materials temperature. This can cause different methods of flaw evaluation:
appreciable errors in measurements if the instrument
has been calibrated on a cold reference block and is If the diameter of the sound beam is smaller than the
then used on a warm or hot test object. Such measure- extent of the flaw, then the beam can be used to ex-
ment errors can be avoided either by warming the refer- plore the boundaries of the flaw and thus determine its
ence block to the same temperature before calibrating, area.
or by using a correction factor obtained from tables.
If, however, the diameter of the sound beam is larger
than the size of the flaw, the maximum echo response
Measurement of remaining wall thickness from the flaw must be compared with the maximum
echo response from an artificial flaw provided for com-
The measurement of the remaining wall thickness on parison purposes.
plant components, e.g. pipes, tanks and reaction ves-
sels of all types which are corroded or eroded from the
inside, requires a perfectly suitable gauge and special Flaw boundary method
care in handling the probe.
The smaller the diameter of the probes sound beam,
The inspectors should always be informed about the the more accurately the boundaries (and therefore the
corresponding nominal wall thicknesses and the likely flaw area) can be determined by the flaw boundary
amount of wall thickness losses. method. If, however, the sound beam is relatively
broad, the flaw area determined can substantially differ
from the actual flaw area. Care should therefore be
taken to select a probe which will give a sufficiently
narrow beam at the position of the flaw.

1-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Important information on ultrasonic testing Introduction

Echo display comparison method The ultrasonic wave is attenuated in any material. This
sound attenuation is very low, e.g. in parts made of
The echo from a small, natural flaw is usually smaller fine-grained steel, likewise in many small parts made of
than the echo from an artificial comparison flaw, e.g. other materials. However, if the sound wave travels
circular disc flaw of the same size. This is due, for in- larger distances through the material, a high cumulative
stance, to the roughness of the surface of a natural sound attenuation can result even with small attenua-
flaw, or to the fact that the beam does not impinge on it tion coefficients. There is then a danger that echoes
at right angles. from natural flaws appear too small. For this reason, an
If this fact is not taken into account when evaluating estimate must always be made of the effects of attenu-
natural flaws, there is a danger of underestimating their ation on the evaluation result and taken into account if
magnitude. applicable.

In the case of very jagged or fissured flaws, e.g. shrink If the test object has a rough surface, part of the inci-
holes in castings, it may be that the sound scattering dent sound energy will be scattered at its surface and
occurring at the boundary surface of the flaw is so is not available for the test. The larger this initial scat-
strong that no echo at all is produced. In such cases, a tering, the smaller the flaw echoes appear, and the
different evaluation method should be chosen, e.g. use more errors occur in the evaluation result.
of the backwall echo attenuation in the evaluation. It is therefore important to take the effect of the test
The distance sensitivity of the flaw echo plays an im- objects surfaces on the height of the echo into account
portant part when testing large components. Attention (transfer correction).
should be paid here to choosing artificial comparison
flaws which are as far as possible governed by the
same distance laws as the natural flaws to be evalu-
ated.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-7

Important information on ultrasonic testing Introduction

Echo display comparison method The ultrasonic wave is attenuated in any material. This
sound attenuation is very low, e.g. in parts made of
The echo from a small, natural flaw is usually smaller fine-grained steel, likewise in many small parts made of
than the echo from an artificial comparison flaw, e.g. other materials. However, if the sound wave travels
circular disc flaw of the same size. This is due, for in- larger distances through the material, a high cumulative
stance, to the roughness of the surface of a natural sound attenuation can result even with small attenua-
flaw, or to the fact that the beam does not impinge on it tion coefficients. There is then a danger that echoes
at right angles. from natural flaws appear too small. For this reason, an
If this fact is not taken into account when evaluating estimate must always be made of the effects of attenu-
natural flaws, there is a danger of underestimating their ation on the evaluation result and taken into account if
magnitude. applicable.

In the case of very jagged or fissured flaws, e.g. shrink If the test object has a rough surface, part of the inci-
holes in castings, it may be that the sound scattering dent sound energy will be scattered at its surface and
occurring at the boundary surface of the flaw is so is not available for the test. The larger this initial scat-
strong that no echo at all is produced. In such cases, a tering, the smaller the flaw echoes appear, and the
different evaluation method should be chosen, e.g. use more errors occur in the evaluation result.
of the backwall echo attenuation in the evaluation. It is therefore important to take the effect of the test
The distance sensitivity of the flaw echo plays an im- objects surfaces on the height of the echo into account
portant part when testing large components. Attention (transfer correction).
should be paid here to choosing artificial comparison
flaws which are as far as possible governed by the
same distance laws as the natural flaws to be evalu-
ated.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-7


Introduction The USM 35X family

1.3 The USM 35X family The different instrument versions


The USM 35X is available in several versions which are
The USM 35X is a lightweight and compact ultrasonic desgined for different applications:
flaw detector especially suitable for
USM 35X
locating and evaluating material defects, Standard version for universal ultrasonic test applica-
measuring wall thicknesses, tions.
saving and documenting test results. USM 35X DAC
The multiple DAC curves and time-corrected gain
With its frequency range from 0.5 to 20 MHz and a enable a field-oriented echo amplitude evaluation
maximum calibration range of 10 m (steel), the USM 35X according to almost all international test specifica-
is designed for use on large workpieces and in high- tions.
resolution measurements.
USM 35X S
DGS evaluation mode in addition to multiple DAC
curves and TCG.
DGS curves are stored for all narrow-band single-
element probes; amplitude evaluation is carried out
either in dB above DAC curve or equivalent reflector
size (ERS).
Data Logger option
This option is available for all USM 35X versions and
is used for the recording and documentation of thick-
ness readings.

1-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Introduction The USM 35X family

1.3 The USM 35X family The different instrument versions


The USM 35X is available in several versions which are
The USM 35X is a lightweight and compact ultrasonic desgined for different applications:
flaw detector especially suitable for
USM 35X
locating and evaluating material defects, Standard version for universal ultrasonic test applica-
measuring wall thicknesses, tions.
saving and documenting test results. USM 35X DAC
The multiple DAC curves and time-corrected gain
With its frequency range from 0.5 to 20 MHz and a enable a field-oriented echo amplitude evaluation
maximum calibration range of 10 m (steel), the USM 35X according to almost all international test specifica-
is designed for use on large workpieces and in high- tions.
resolution measurements.
USM 35X S
DGS evaluation mode in addition to multiple DAC
curves and TCG.
DGS curves are stored for all narrow-band single-
element probes; amplitude evaluation is carried out
either in dB above DAC curve or equivalent reflector
size (ERS).
Data Logger option
This option is available for all USM 35X versions and
is used for the recording and documentation of thick-
ness readings.

1-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


The USM 35X family Introduction

Special features VGA interface for the connection of an external


monitor
low weight (2.2 kg including lithium-ion battery) and
compact size color display of gates for an easier distinction
waterproof instrument case with protection class easily recognizable reflection geometry when using
IP 66 angle-beam probes by the variation of A-scan or
background color at every deflection point
long operating time (> 12 hours) by means of lithium-
ion battery with internal and external charging possi- data memory: 800 data sets, including alphanumeric
bility description, documentation possibility via a printer
handy equipped with a non-slip, ratcheting prop-up increased calibration range: up to 9999 mm (steel),
stand, also used as handle depending on the frequency range
rotary knobs for direct adjustment of gain as well as semiautomatic two point calibration
for changing the currently selected function pulse repetition frequency variable in ten steps
two independant gates for accurate wall thickness to avoid phantom echoes when testing large
measurements from the workpiece surface up to the workpieces
first echo, or between two backwall echoes, including choice of frequency range for the connected probe
measurement on coated workpieces with a resolution
signal display mode: full-wave rectification, positive
of 0.01 mm (up to 100 mm), referred to steel
half-wave or negative halv-wave and radio frequency
magnify gate: spreading of the gate range over the
display of 4 readings plus 1 reading zoomed in the
entire screen width
A-scan, user-configurable
5.7", 1/4 VGA-TFT color display to display the digi-
tized signals (320 240 pixels, 115 86 mm )

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-9

The USM 35X family Introduction

Special features VGA interface for the connection of an external


monitor
low weight (2.2 kg including lithium-ion battery) and
compact size color display of gates for an easier distinction
waterproof instrument case with protection class easily recognizable reflection geometry when using
IP 66 angle-beam probes by the variation of A-scan or
background color at every deflection point
long operating time (> 12 hours) by means of lithium-
ion battery with internal and external charging possi- data memory: 800 data sets, including alphanumeric
bility description, documentation possibility via a printer
handy equipped with a non-slip, ratcheting prop-up increased calibration range: up to 9999 mm (steel),
stand, also used as handle depending on the frequency range
rotary knobs for direct adjustment of gain as well as semiautomatic two point calibration
for changing the currently selected function pulse repetition frequency variable in ten steps
two independant gates for accurate wall thickness to avoid phantom echoes when testing large
measurements from the workpiece surface up to the workpieces
first echo, or between two backwall echoes, including choice of frequency range for the connected probe
measurement on coated workpieces with a resolution
signal display mode: full-wave rectification, positive
of 0.01 mm (up to 100 mm), referred to steel
half-wave or negative halv-wave and radio frequency
magnify gate: spreading of the gate range over the
display of 4 readings plus 1 reading zoomed in the
entire screen width
A-scan, user-configurable
5.7", 1/4 VGA-TFT color display to display the digi-
tized signals (320 240 pixels, 115 86 mm )

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-9


Introduction How to use this manual

1.4 How to use this manual The specifications/Technical Specifications according


to EN 12668-1 for the USM 35X family can be found in
the attachment at the end of this operating manual.
The present operating manual applies to all instrument
versions of the USM 35X. Differences in the functions The Data Logger option, which can be applied to all
or setting values are always marked. USM 35X versions, is described in a chapter of its own
at the end of the operating manual. All functions refer-
Before operating the USM 35X for the first time, it is
ring to the Data Logger and the tolerance monitor are
absolutely necessary that you read the chapters 1, 3
described here. At the same time, the standard operat-
and 4 of this manual. They will inform you about the
ing manual applies to all other functions.
necessary preparations of the instrument, give you a
description of all keys and screen displays, and explain
the operating principle.

In doing this, you will avoid any errors or failures of the


instrument and be able to use the full range of instru-
ment functions.

You will find the latest changes to this operating manual


in chapter 10 Changes. It describes corrections that
have become necessary at short notice and have not
yet been included in the general manual. If no correc-
tions have become necessary, this chapter is empty.

1-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Introduction How to use this manual

1.4 How to use this manual The specifications/Technical Specifications according


to EN 12668-1 for the USM 35X family can be found in
the attachment at the end of this operating manual.
The present operating manual applies to all instrument
versions of the USM 35X. Differences in the functions The Data Logger option, which can be applied to all
or setting values are always marked. USM 35X versions, is described in a chapter of its own
at the end of the operating manual. All functions refer-
Before operating the USM 35X for the first time, it is
ring to the Data Logger and the tolerance monitor are
absolutely necessary that you read the chapters 1, 3
described here. At the same time, the standard operat-
and 4 of this manual. They will inform you about the
ing manual applies to all other functions.
necessary preparations of the instrument, give you a
description of all keys and screen displays, and explain
the operating principle.

In doing this, you will avoid any errors or failures of the


instrument and be able to use the full range of instru-
ment functions.

You will find the latest changes to this operating manual


in chapter 10 Changes. It describes corrections that
have become necessary at short notice and have not
yet been included in the general manual. If no correc-
tions have become necessary, this chapter is empty.

1-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Layout and presentation in this manual Introduction

1.5 Layout and presentation in Listings


this manual Listings are presented in the following form:
Variant A
To make it easier for you to use this manual, all operat-
ing steps, notes, etc., are always presented in the Variant B
same way. This will help you find individual pieces of ...
information quickly.
Operating steps
Attention and Note symbols Operating steps appear as shown in the following ex-
ample:
A Attention: Loosen the two screws at the bottom.
The Attention symbol indicates peculiarities and spe-
cial aspects in the operation which could affect the Remove the cover.
accuracy of the results. ...

H Note:
Note contains e.g. references to other chapters or spe-
cial recommendations for a function.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-11

Layout and presentation in this manual Introduction

1.5 Layout and presentation in Listings


this manual Listings are presented in the following form:
Variant A
To make it easier for you to use this manual, all operat-
ing steps, notes, etc., are always presented in the Variant B
same way. This will help you find individual pieces of ...
information quickly.
Operating steps
Attention and Note symbols Operating steps appear as shown in the following ex-
ample:
A Attention: Loosen the two screws at the bottom.
The Attention symbol indicates peculiarities and spe-
cial aspects in the operation which could affect the Remove the cover.
accuracy of the results. ...

H Note:
Note contains e.g. references to other chapters or spe-
cial recommendations for a function.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 1-11


1-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

1-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Standard package and accessories 2

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 2-1

Standard package and accessories 2

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 2-1


Standard package and accessories

This chapter informs you about the standard package


and the accessories available for the USM 35X.

It describes
accessories included in the standard package,
recommended accessories.

2-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Standard package and accessories

This chapter informs you about the standard package


and the accessories available for the USM 35X.

It describes
accessories included in the standard package,
recommended accessories.

2-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Standard package Standard package and accessories

2.1 Standard package


Product code Description Order number

Ultrasonic testing kit


consisting of:
USM 35X Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, basic version
with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors 36 060
or
with BNC connectors 36 061

or

USM 35X DAC Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, DAC version


with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors 36 062
or
with BNC connectors 36 063

or

USM 35X S Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, DAC/TCG and


DGS evaluation with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors 36 064
or
with BNC connectors 36 065

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 2-3

Standard package Standard package and accessories

2.1 Standard package


Product code Description Order number

Ultrasonic testing kit


consisting of:
USM 35X Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, basic version
with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors 36 060
or
with BNC connectors 36 061

or

USM 35X DAC Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, DAC version


with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors 36 062
or
with BNC connectors 36 063

or

USM 35X S Compact Ultrasonic Flaw Detector, DAC/TCG and


DGS evaluation with LEMO-1-TRIAX connectors 36 064
or
with BNC connectors 36 065

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 2-3


Standard package and accessories Standard package

Product code Description Order number

UM 30 Transport case 35 654


AC power supply/battery charger 102 163

Operating manual in English 48 001

2-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Standard package and accessories Standard package

Product code Description Order number

UM 30 Transport case 35 654


AC power supply/battery charger 102 163

Operating manual in English 48 001

2-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Recommended accessories Standard package and accessories

2.2 Recommended accessories


Product code Description Order number

Operating manual in German 48 002

Operating manual in French 48 003

Operating manual in Spanish 48 004

Operating manual in Japanese 48 005

Operating manual in Chinese 48 006

LI-ION Li-Ion battery NI2020, 10.8 V, 6.6 Ah 102 208

DR36 Battery charger for external charging


of the Li-Ion battery 35 297

NCA 1-6 6 NiCd cells, 3 Ah (alternatively to Li-Ion) 25 810

Energy 16 Desk rapid charger for external charging


of NiMH or NiCd cells 101 729

UM 32 Protection bag including neck strap 35 655

UD 20 PC cable, 25-pin (PC), 9-pin (instrument) 32 291

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 2-5

Recommended accessories Standard package and accessories

2.2 Recommended accessories


Product code Description Order number

Operating manual in German 48 002

Operating manual in French 48 003

Operating manual in Spanish 48 004

Operating manual in Japanese 48 005

Operating manual in Chinese 48 006

LI-ION Li-Ion battery NI2020, 10.8 V, 6.6 Ah 102 208

DR36 Battery charger for external charging


of the Li-Ion battery 35 297

NCA 1-6 6 NiCd cells, 3 Ah (alternatively to Li-Ion) 25 810

Energy 16 Desk rapid charger for external charging


of NiMH or NiCd cells 101 729

UM 32 Protection bag including neck strap 35 655

UD 20 PC cable, 25-pin (PC), 9-pin (instrument) 32 291

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 2-5


Standard package and accessories Recommended accessories

Product code Description Order number

UD 31 PC cable, 9-pin (PC), 9-pin (instrument) 34 943


UD 30 Seiko Printer cable, 9-pin (instrument)/9-pin (printer) 18 495
UD 32 Epson Printer cable, 9-pin (instrument)/25-pin (printer) 34 944
Adapter 25/9-pin for printer cable UD 19-1 on USM 35X 16 121
Serial-to-parallel printer cable (Patton Model 2029) 101 761
Adapter cable RS232 USB 35 838
UM 25 Analog cable, 8-pin Lemo plug (instrument), open ended 35 268
UM 31 VGA adapter for connection of an external monitor 35 653
UM 28 D Option: Data Logger (retrofittable to all versions) 35 800
UM 200 W UltraDOC data communication software for USM 35 024
U 100 W UltraDOC 33 829
PZ-USM Calibration certificate according to EN 12668-1 35 263
Epson LX Matrix printer for mains operation, single sheet and
continuous stationary 17 995
Seiko DPU Thermal printer for mains and battery operation 17 993
2-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Standard package and accessories Recommended accessories

Product code Description Order number

UD 31 PC cable, 9-pin (PC), 9-pin (instrument) 34 943


UD 30 Seiko Printer cable, 9-pin (instrument)/9-pin (printer) 18 495
UD 32 Epson Printer cable, 9-pin (instrument)/25-pin (printer) 34 944
Adapter 25/9-pin for printer cable UD 19-1 on USM 35X 16 121
Serial-to-parallel printer cable (Patton Model 2029) 101 761
Adapter cable RS232 USB 35 838
UM 25 Analog cable, 8-pin Lemo plug (instrument), open ended 35 268
UM 31 VGA adapter for connection of an external monitor 35 653
UM 28 D Option: Data Logger (retrofittable to all versions) 35 800
UM 200 W UltraDOC data communication software for USM 35 024
U 100 W UltraDOC 33 829
PZ-USM Calibration certificate according to EN 12668-1 35 263
Epson LX Matrix printer for mains operation, single sheet and
continuous stationary 17 995
Seiko DPU Thermal printer for mains and battery operation 17 993
2-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X
Initial start-up 3

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 3-1

Initial start-up 3

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 3-1


Initial start-up Power supply

3.1 Power supply Connecting the instrument


Connect the USM 35X to the mains socket-outlet using
The USM 35X can be operated with an external power the corresponding power supply unit. The plug recep-
pack adaptor or with batteries. tacle is at the top left of the USM 35X.

You can connect the USM 35X to the mains supply Push the Lemo plug of the power supply unit into the
system even if it carries batteries. The battery power is plug receptacle until it snaps into place with a clearly
then automatically interrupted. audible click.

Operation using the power supply unit


Mains connection
The power supply unit is delivered with two different
power cables for Euro and USA standard.

3-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Initial start-up Power supply

3.1 Power supply Connecting the instrument


Connect the USM 35X to the mains socket-outlet using
The USM 35X can be operated with an external power the corresponding power supply unit. The plug recep-
pack adaptor or with batteries. tacle is at the top left of the USM 35X.

You can connect the USM 35X to the mains supply Push the Lemo plug of the power supply unit into the
system even if it carries batteries. The battery power is plug receptacle until it snaps into place with a clearly
then automatically interrupted. audible click.

Operation using the power supply unit


Mains connection
The power supply unit is delivered with two different
power cables for Euro and USA standard.

3-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Power supply Initial start-up

When pulling off the Lemo plug, withdraw the metal Lift the lid off upward. To the right in the open battery
bushing on the plug first in order to release the lock. compartment, you will see two springs and several
connection pins.
The power supply unit is automatically set to any nomi-
nal voltage between 90 VAC and 240 VAC.

Operation using batteries


Use either a lithium-ion battery or 6 standard C-cells
(NiCad, NiMH, or alkaline cells) for the battery opera-
tion. We recommend the use of a lithium-ion battery. It
has a higher capacity and consequently ensures a
longer operating time of the instrument.

Inserting batteries Insert the battery into the battery compartment. To


The battery compartment is situated at the instrument do this, first press the right side of the battery
back; the lid is fastened with 2 attachment screws. against the springs of the battery compartment.
Make sure that the socket on the right side of the
Press the two attachment screws of the battery battery is connected with the connection pins in the
compartment downward in order to loosen them. battery compartment.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 3-3

Power supply Initial start-up

When pulling off the Lemo plug, withdraw the metal Lift the lid off upward. To the right in the open battery
bushing on the plug first in order to release the lock. compartment, you will see two springs and several
connection pins.
The power supply unit is automatically set to any nomi-
nal voltage between 90 VAC and 240 VAC.

Operation using batteries


Use either a lithium-ion battery or 6 standard C-cells
(NiCad, NiMH, or alkaline cells) for the battery opera-
tion. We recommend the use of a lithium-ion battery. It
has a higher capacity and consequently ensures a
longer operating time of the instrument.

Inserting batteries Insert the battery into the battery compartment. To


The battery compartment is situated at the instrument do this, first press the right side of the battery
back; the lid is fastened with 2 attachment screws. against the springs of the battery compartment.
Make sure that the socket on the right side of the
Press the two attachment screws of the battery battery is connected with the connection pins in the
compartment downward in order to loosen them. battery compartment.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 3-3


Initial start-up Power supply

Close the battery compartment and fasten the


attachment screws.

Checking the battery charge of lithium-ion batteries


The lithium-ion battery is equipped with a battery
charge indicator. The battery charge indicator is situated
at the front right of the battery. Four LEDs indicate the
charge level of battery. Check the battery charge before
inserting the battery into the instrument.

or The number of LEDs that are on has the following


meaning:
Insert the batteries into the battery compartment and
check the right polarity. 4 LEDs battery charge 100 ... 76%

3 LEDs battery charge 75 ... 51%

2 LEDs battery charge 50 ... 26%

1 LED battery charge 25 ... 10%

1 LED flashing battery charge <10%

3-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Initial start-up Power supply

Close the battery compartment and fasten the


attachment screws.

Checking the battery charge of lithium-ion batteries


The lithium-ion battery is equipped with a battery
charge indicator. The battery charge indicator is situated
at the front right of the battery. Four LEDs indicate the
charge level of battery. Check the battery charge before
inserting the battery into the instrument.

or The number of LEDs that are on has the following


meaning:
Insert the batteries into the battery compartment and
check the right polarity. 4 LEDs battery charge 100 ... 76%

3 LEDs battery charge 75 ... 51%

2 LEDs battery charge 50 ... 26%

1 LED battery charge 25 ... 10%

1 LED flashing battery charge <10%

3-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Power supply Initial start-up

H Note:
If the icon for low battery charge appears, you should
urgently close your test job and exchange the batteries.
You should take replacement batteries with you if you
aim to carry out measurements on site.

Charging the batteries


Press the button PUSH at the front side of the You can charge the lithium-ion battery either directly in
battery. Four LEDs indicate the charge level of the instrument or by means of an external battery
battery. charger. You always need an external battery charger to
charge standard C-cells.
H Note:
Internal charging
You can also check the battery charge even if the battery
is located in the battery compartment of the instrument. Requirement:

Battery charge indicator Lithium-ion battery, order number 102 208

In the measurement line of the USM 35X, an inverted B Power supply/charger unit, order number 102 163
appears if the battery charge is low.
If a battery is located in the instrument, the charging
process is started automatically when you connect the
plug-in power supply unit. You can carry out ultrasonic
inspections and charge a battery at the same time.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 3-5

Power supply Initial start-up

H Note:
If the icon for low battery charge appears, you should
urgently close your test job and exchange the batteries.
You should take replacement batteries with you if you
aim to carry out measurements on site.

Charging the batteries


Press the button PUSH at the front side of the You can charge the lithium-ion battery either directly in
battery. Four LEDs indicate the charge level of the instrument or by means of an external battery
battery. charger. You always need an external battery charger to
charge standard C-cells.
H Note:
Internal charging
You can also check the battery charge even if the battery
is located in the battery compartment of the instrument. Requirement:

Battery charge indicator Lithium-ion battery, order number 102 208

In the measurement line of the USM 35X, an inverted B Power supply/charger unit, order number 102 163
appears if the battery charge is low.
If a battery is located in the instrument, the charging
process is started automatically when you connect the
plug-in power supply unit. You can carry out ultrasonic
inspections and charge a battery at the same time.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 3-5


Initial start-up Power supply

The charging time is 10 hours with a simultaneous ul- External charging


trasonic inspection. If the instrument is not being used
Lithium-ion batteries can be charged by means of an
for ultrasonic inspections, the charging time is 8 hours.
external battery charger. We recommend the battery
This charging time applies to ambient temperatures
charger with the order number 35 297. To charge single
from 25 to 30 C. Please take into consideration that
NiCad or NiMH cells, you need the external desktop
the batteries are not charged to their full capacity at
battery charger with the order number 101 729.
higher temperatures.

The LED display on the plug-in power supply unit indi-


cates the status of the charging process.

green LED yellow LED red LED Status

off flashing off no battery detected


off flashing dark/bright flashing bright/dark charging at low power
off on off quick charging phase 1
flashing dark/bright flashing bright/dark off quick charging phase 2
on off off battery charged
off off flashing bright/dark temperature error, auto-reversible
off off on csharging error, permanent

3-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Initial start-up Power supply

The charging time is 10 hours with a simultaneous ul- External charging


trasonic inspection. If the instrument is not being used
Lithium-ion batteries can be charged by means of an
for ultrasonic inspections, the charging time is 8 hours.
external battery charger. We recommend the battery
This charging time applies to ambient temperatures
charger with the order number 35 297. To charge single
from 25 to 30 C. Please take into consideration that
NiCad or NiMH cells, you need the external desktop
the batteries are not charged to their full capacity at
battery charger with the order number 101 729.
higher temperatures.

The LED display on the plug-in power supply unit indi-


cates the status of the charging process.

green LED yellow LED red LED Status

off flashing off no battery detected


off flashing dark/bright flashing bright/dark charging at low power
off on off quick charging phase 1
flashing dark/bright flashing bright/dark off quick charging phase 2
on off off battery charged
off off flashing bright/dark temperature error, auto-reversible
off off on csharging error, permanent

3-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Connecting a probe Initial start-up

3.2 Connecting a probe A Attention:


If this is not taken into account, the consequence
To prepare the USM 35X for operation, you have to would be a mismatching which may lead to consider-
connect a probe to it. Any Krautkramer probe can be able power losses or even to echo waveform distor-
used for the USM 35X, provided the appropriate cable tions.
is available and the operating frequency is within an
adequate range. Receiver Transmitter

The USM 35X is available with the probe connectors


LEMO-1-TRIAX or BNC.

The probe is connected to the sockets at the top right


on the instrument casing. Both connector sockets are
equally suitable (connected in parallel) for connecting
probes equipped with only one ultrasonic element (ultra-
sonic transducer) so that it does not matter which one
of the two sockets is used.

When connecting a dual-element (TR) probe (having


one transmitter element and one receiver element), or
two probes (of which one is transmitting and the other
one receiving), attention should be paid to connecting
the transmitter element to the right-hand socket (trans-
mitter, marked with black circle at the rear of the instru-
ment case) and the receiver element to the left-hand
socket (receiver, marked with red circle).
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 3-7

Connecting a probe Initial start-up

3.2 Connecting a probe A Attention:


If this is not taken into account, the consequence
To prepare the USM 35X for operation, you have to would be a mismatching which may lead to consider-
connect a probe to it. Any Krautkramer probe can be able power losses or even to echo waveform distor-
used for the USM 35X, provided the appropriate cable tions.
is available and the operating frequency is within an
adequate range. Receiver Transmitter

The USM 35X is available with the probe connectors


LEMO-1-TRIAX or BNC.

The probe is connected to the sockets at the top right


on the instrument casing. Both connector sockets are
equally suitable (connected in parallel) for connecting
probes equipped with only one ultrasonic element (ultra-
sonic transducer) so that it does not matter which one
of the two sockets is used.

When connecting a dual-element (TR) probe (having


one transmitter element and one receiver element), or
two probes (of which one is transmitting and the other
one receiving), attention should be paid to connecting
the transmitter element to the right-hand socket (trans-
mitter, marked with black circle at the rear of the instru-
ment case) and the receiver element to the left-hand
socket (receiver, marked with red circle).
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 3-7
Initial start-up Starting the USM 35X

3.3 Starting the USM 35X Reset


If any functions can no longer be operated after a warm
start, or if you want to reset the instrument to the basic
Switching on setup, then you should carry out a cold start by simul-
To start the USM 35X, press the switch-on key . taneously pressing the and the key.

The start display of the USM 35X appears; here you The cold start message Basic Initialization is dis-
will also see the current software version of the instru- played. The instrument is initialized and reset to its
ment. The instrument carries out a self-check and then basic setup (dialog language: English, for more details
switches over to stand-by mode. on how to select the language, please refer to chapter 4).

The settings of all function values and the basic set-


tings (language and units) are the same as before
A Attention:
switching-on of the instrument. All saved data are deleted.

Information lines in the startup screen


You can enter two lines (each with up to 39 characters)
for information purposes in the startup screen. For this
use the remote function (codes I1 and I2, refer to chap-
ter 8).

3-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Initial start-up Starting the USM 35X

3.3 Starting the USM 35X Reset


If any functions can no longer be operated after a warm
start, or if you want to reset the instrument to the basic
Switching on setup, then you should carry out a cold start by simul-
To start the USM 35X, press the switch-on key . taneously pressing the and the key.

The start display of the USM 35X appears; here you The cold start message Basic Initialization is dis-
will also see the current software version of the instru- played. The instrument is initialized and reset to its
ment. The instrument carries out a self-check and then basic setup (dialog language: English, for more details
switches over to stand-by mode. on how to select the language, please refer to chapter 4).

The settings of all function values and the basic set-


tings (language and units) are the same as before
A Attention:
switching-on of the instrument. All saved data are deleted.

Information lines in the startup screen


You can enter two lines (each with up to 39 characters)
for information purposes in the startup screen. For this
use the remote function (codes I1 and I2, refer to chap-
ter 8).

3-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Principles of operation 4

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-1

Principles of operation 4

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-1


Principles of operation Operators controls

4.1 Operators controls LED A: Gate alarm


R: Rejection
D: Dual on
Special keys for Keys for selecting
special instrument a function
functions

Rotary knob for Rotary knob for


direct gain setting direct setting of the
current function

Key for changing On/Off key


the operation level

Keys for selecting a function group

4-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Principles of operation Operators controls

4.1 Operators controls LED A: Gate alarm


R: Rejection
D: Dual on
Special keys for Keys for selecting
special instrument a function
functions

Rotary knob for Rotary knob for


direct gain setting direct setting of the
current function

Key for changing On/Off key


the operation level

Keys for selecting a function group

4-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Screen display Principles of operation

4.2 Screen display


The USM 35X has a digital screen for the display of

A-scan in the normal mode

A-scan in the zoom mode


The zoom mode is activated using the key .

H Note:
The screen display always shows the gain and the ad-
justed dB step value. All other functions are locked in
zoom mode.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-3

Screen display Principles of operation

4.2 Screen display


The USM 35X has a digital screen for the display of

A-scan in the normal mode

A-scan in the zoom mode


The zoom mode is activated using the key .

H Note:
The screen display always shows the gain and the ad-
justed dB step value. All other functions are locked in
zoom mode.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-3


Principles of operation Screen display

Functions on the display


The names of the five function groups are displayed at
the bottom of the screen. The currently selected func-
tion group is highlighted.

Indicated at the right of the display, next to the A-scan,


are the functions of the corresponding function group.
The display of the functions disappears in the zoom
mode.

4-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Principles of operation Screen display

Functions on the display


The names of the five function groups are displayed at
the bottom of the screen. The currently selected func-
tion group is highlighted.

Indicated at the right of the display, next to the A-scan,


are the functions of the corresponding function group.
The display of the functions disappears in the zoom
mode.

4-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Screen display Principles of operation

Other displays
The measurement line below the screen display shows
values of settings, measured values, and status indica-
tions. As an alternative, a scale can be shown here,
giving an overview of the echo positions.

H Note:
Every measurement value can also be shown in an
enlarged display at the top right corner of the A-scan
(setting in the function group MEAS, function S-DISP).

Amplitude height Amplitude height Status indicator:


Gate A (%) Gate B (%) TOF = Flank
H Note:

You can configure the four positions of the measure-


ment line for set and measured values as required
(function group MSEL). Please refer to chapter 5.14,
section Configuring the measurement line on this sub- Sound path Sound path
ject. Gate A Gate B

Example of a measurement line

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-5

Screen display Principles of operation

Other displays
The measurement line below the screen display shows
values of settings, measured values, and status indica-
tions. As an alternative, a scale can be shown here,
giving an overview of the echo positions.

H Note:
Every measurement value can also be shown in an
enlarged display at the top right corner of the A-scan
(setting in the function group MEAS, function S-DISP).

Amplitude height Amplitude height Status indicator:


Gate A (%) Gate B (%) TOF = Flank
H Note:

You can configure the four positions of the measure-


ment line for set and measured values as required
(function group MSEL). Please refer to chapter 5.14,
section Configuring the measurement line on this sub- Sound path Sound path
ject. Gate A Gate B

Example of a measurement line

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-5


Principles of operation Keys and rotary knobs

4.3 Keys and rotary knobs

Function keys
For changing between operation levels (below),

For selection of the function groups (below) and

For selection of the functions (right).

On/Off key
For turning the device on or off.

4-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Principles of operation Keys and rotary knobs

4.3 Keys and rotary knobs

Function keys
For changing between operation levels (below),

For selection of the function groups (below) and

For selection of the functions (right).

On/Off key
For turning the device on or off.

4-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Keys and rotary knobs Principles of operation

Special keys
To directly activate individual instrument functions:

To choose the increment for the gain setting

To freeze the A-scan

To display a zoomed A-scan

To transfer the data

To record measured values and to save the data

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-7

Keys and rotary knobs Principles of operation

Special keys
To directly activate individual instrument functions:

To choose the increment for the gain setting

To freeze the A-scan

To display a zoomed A-scan

To transfer the data

To record measured values and to save the data

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-7


Principles of operation Keys and rotary knobs

Rotary knobs 4.4 Operational concept


The USM 35X is equipped with two rotary knobs.
The USM 35X is an easy-to-use instrument. It has
The left-hand rotary knob enables you to directly set three operating levels, and you can change between
the gain; the right-hand rotary knob serves for setting them by pressing the key. You will recognize your
the currently selected function. currently active operating level by the number on the
separation line between the first and the second func-
The two rotary knobs enable both step-by-step and tion group.
accelerated settings. You can define a setting step by
step by slightly operating the rotary knob which will If the instrument is equipped with the Data Logger option,
snap into place at the next setting. To accelerate the a fourth operating level is added to the existing ones.
setting, operate the rotary knob continuously, i.e. at a
constant speed. This enables you to quickly bridge Each operating level contains five function groups.
great differences between the settings. First operating level

Second operating level

Third operating level

4-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Principles of operation Keys and rotary knobs

Rotary knobs 4.4 Operational concept


The USM 35X is equipped with two rotary knobs.
The USM 35X is an easy-to-use instrument. It has
The left-hand rotary knob enables you to directly set three operating levels, and you can change between
the gain; the right-hand rotary knob serves for setting them by pressing the key. You will recognize your
the currently selected function. currently active operating level by the number on the
separation line between the first and the second func-
The two rotary knobs enable both step-by-step and tion group.
accelerated settings. You can define a setting step by
step by slightly operating the rotary knob which will If the instrument is equipped with the Data Logger option,
snap into place at the next setting. To accelerate the a fourth operating level is added to the existing ones.
setting, operate the rotary knob continuously, i.e. at a
constant speed. This enables you to quickly bridge Each operating level contains five function groups.
great differences between the settings. First operating level

Second operating level

Third operating level

4-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Operational concept Principles of operation

Setting the functions The following functions offer a choice between coarse
and fine adjustment:
Shown below the A-scan are five function groups that
you can directly select using the corresponding key. Function Function group
The selected function group is highlighted and the cor-
responding four functions are displayed next to the RANGE BASE
A-scan on the right. You can likewise directly select the MTLVEL BASE
individual functions using the corresponding keys. D-DELAY BASE
aSTART aGAT
Functions with double assignments aWIDTH aGAT
bWIDTH bGAT
Some functions have double assignments. You will rec- S-REF1 CAL
ognize the functions with double assignments by an S-REF2 CAL
arrow (icon >) after the function name. ANGLE TRIG
THICKNE TRIG
Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press-
DIAMET TRIG
ing the corresponding key .
For more details on the adjustment possibilities, please
Coarse and fine adjustment of functions read from page 5-5 onward.
You can choose between coarse and fine adjustment
for some functions. You can toggle between these two
adjustment modes by pressing the corresponding
key several times. The fine adjustment is identified
by an asterisk preceding the function value.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-9

Operational concept Principles of operation

Setting the functions The following functions offer a choice between coarse
and fine adjustment:
Shown below the A-scan are five function groups that
you can directly select using the corresponding key. Function Function group
The selected function group is highlighted and the cor-
responding four functions are displayed next to the RANGE BASE
A-scan on the right. You can likewise directly select the MTLVEL BASE
individual functions using the corresponding keys. D-DELAY BASE
aSTART aGAT
Functions with double assignments aWIDTH aGAT
bWIDTH bGAT
Some functions have double assignments. You will rec- S-REF1 CAL
ognize the functions with double assignments by an S-REF2 CAL
arrow (icon >) after the function name. ANGLE TRIG
THICKNE TRIG
Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press-
DIAMET TRIG
ing the corresponding key .
For more details on the adjustment possibilities, please
Coarse and fine adjustment of functions read from page 5-5 onward.
You can choose between coarse and fine adjustment
for some functions. You can toggle between these two
adjustment modes by pressing the corresponding
key several times. The fine adjustment is identified
by an asterisk preceding the function value.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-9


Principles of operation Important basic settings

4.5 Important basic settings Russian


Slovakian
Norwegian
Selecting the language Polish
Select the language in which the function names should Japanese
be displayed on the screen in the function DIALOG
(Function group CFG1). The following languages are H Note:
available: More dialog languages can be added on request.
German
If necessary, go to the third operating level.
English (default setting)
French In the function group CFG1 select the function
Italian DIALOG.
Spanish
Portuguese
Dutch
Swedish
Slovenian
Romanian
Finnish
Czech
Danish
Hungarian
Croatian
4-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Principles of operation Important basic settings

4.5 Important basic settings Russian


Slovakian
Norwegian
Selecting the language Polish
Select the language in which the function names should Japanese
be displayed on the screen in the function DIALOG
(Function group CFG1). The following languages are H Note:
available: More dialog languages can be added on request.
German
If necessary, go to the third operating level.
English (default setting)
French In the function group CFG1 select the function
Italian DIALOG.
Spanish
Portuguese
Dutch
Swedish
Slovenian
Romanian
Finnish
Czech
Danish
Hungarian
Croatian
4-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X
Important basic settings Principles of operation

H Note:
Double assignment of the function DIALOG/UNIT
(icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly
pressing the corresponding key .

Select the required language by means of the right-


hand rotary knob.

Selecting units
In the function UNIT (function group CFG1) you can
choose your favorite units between mm or inch.
H Note:
If necessary, go to the third operating level.
Double assignment of the function DIALOG/UNIT
In the function group CFG1 select the function UNIT. (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly
pressing the corresponding key .

Set the required unit by means of the right-hand


rotary knob.

A Attention:
Select your units immediately when you start working
with the USM 35X because if you change the unit, all
the current settings are deleted, and the basic setup is
loaded again.
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-11

Important basic settings Principles of operation

H Note:
Double assignment of the function DIALOG/UNIT
(icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly
pressing the corresponding key .

Select the required language by means of the right-


hand rotary knob.

Selecting units
In the function UNIT (function group CFG1) you can
choose your favorite units between mm or inch.
H Note:
If necessary, go to the third operating level.
Double assignment of the function DIALOG/UNIT
In the function group CFG1 select the function UNIT. (icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly
pressing the corresponding key .

Set the required unit by means of the right-hand


rotary knob.

A Attention:
Select your units immediately when you start working
with the USM 35X because if you change the unit, all
the current settings are deleted, and the basic setup is
loaded again.
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-11
Principles of operation Important basic settings

In order not to delete anything by accident, a safety If necessary, change to the third operation level.
prompt is displayed in the measurement line.
Select the function DATE in the function group
If you are sure that you want to change the unit, CFG2.
press the key belonging to the function UNIT one
more time.

The unit is now changed, the current data are


deleted.

If you want to abort the process, press any other


key. The previous setting is kept in that case.

Setting the date


The date is saved together with the test results. You
can set it in the function DATE (function group CFG2).
H Note:

A Attention: Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >).


Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press-
Please take into account that the USM 35X only indi- ing the corresponding key .
cates the year with two digits.
Use the left-hand rotary knob to select the value that
You should always make sure that you use correctly you want to vary, e.g. the day.
set values of date. Test results may otherwise be falsi-
fied. Use the right-hand rotary knob to vary the selected
value.
4-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Principles of operation Important basic settings

In order not to delete anything by accident, a safety If necessary, change to the third operation level.
prompt is displayed in the measurement line.
Select the function DATE in the function group
If you are sure that you want to change the unit, CFG2.
press the key belonging to the function UNIT one
more time.

The unit is now changed, the current data are


deleted.

If you want to abort the process, press any other


key. The previous setting is kept in that case.

Setting the date


The date is saved together with the test results. You
can set it in the function DATE (function group CFG2).
H Note:

A Attention: Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >).


Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press-
Please take into account that the USM 35X only indi- ing the corresponding key .
cates the year with two digits.
Use the left-hand rotary knob to select the value that
You should always make sure that you use correctly you want to vary, e.g. the day.
set values of date. Test results may otherwise be falsi-
fied. Use the right-hand rotary knob to vary the selected
value.
4-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X
Important basic settings Principles of operation

Setting the time


The function TIME (function group CFG2) serves for
setting the current hour of time. It is saved together
with the test results.

A Attention:
You should always make sure that you are using the
correct time settings. Test results may otherwise be
falsified.

Dont forget to manually set the time when changing


from winter to summer time. H Note:
If necessary, change to the third operation level. Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >).
Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press-
Select the function TIME in the function group CFG2. ing the corresponding key .

Use the left-hand rotary knob to select the value that


you want to vary, e.g. the hour.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to vary the selected


value.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-13

Important basic settings Principles of operation

Setting the time


The function TIME (function group CFG2) serves for
setting the current hour of time. It is saved together
with the test results.

A Attention:
You should always make sure that you are using the
correct time settings. Test results may otherwise be
falsified.

Dont forget to manually set the time when changing


from winter to summer time. H Note:
If necessary, change to the third operation level. Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >).
Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press-
Select the function TIME in the function group CFG2. ing the corresponding key .

Use the left-hand rotary knob to select the value that


you want to vary, e.g. the hour.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to vary the selected


value.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 4-13


Principles of operation Basic settings of the display

4.6 Basic settings of the display If necessary, change to the third operation level.

Select the function SCHEME in the function group


The equipment of the USM 35X includes a high-resolu- LCD.
tion color display. You can optimize the display settings
to your individual viewing habits and to the operational Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required
environment. color scheme.

Selecting the color scheme Setting the lighting


You can use the function SCHEME (function group Use the function LIGHT (function group LCD) to set the
LCD) to choose one of four color schemes. The color display lighting. You can choose between the default
scheme determines the color of all displays and that of lighting max. and a lighting in the economy mode min..
the background. You cannot vary the colors of gates
because they are fixed as follows: H Note:
Gate A red The economy mode reduces the current consumption
and consequently increases the operating time in bat-
Gate B green tery operation.
Gate C blue If necessary, change to the third operation level.

H Note: Select the function LIGHT in the function group LCD.

All color schemes are suitable for indoor use. For out- Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required
door use, we recommend the color schemes 3 and 4. lighting.

4-14 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Principles of operation Basic settings of the display

4.6 Basic settings of the display If necessary, change to the third operation level.

Select the function SCHEME in the function group


The equipment of the USM 35X includes a high-resolu- LCD.
tion color display. You can optimize the display settings
to your individual viewing habits and to the operational Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required
environment. color scheme.

Selecting the color scheme Setting the lighting


You can use the function SCHEME (function group Use the function LIGHT (function group LCD) to set the
LCD) to choose one of four color schemes. The color display lighting. You can choose between the default
scheme determines the color of all displays and that of lighting max. and a lighting in the economy mode min..
the background. You cannot vary the colors of gates
because they are fixed as follows: H Note:
Gate A red The economy mode reduces the current consumption
and consequently increases the operating time in bat-
Gate B green tery operation.
Gate C blue If necessary, change to the third operation level.

H Note: Select the function LIGHT in the function group LCD.

All color schemes are suitable for indoor use. For out- Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required
door use, we recommend the color schemes 3 and 4. lighting.

4-14 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Operation 5

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-1

Operation 5

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-1


Operation Overview of the functions

5.1 Overview of the functions Each operating level contains five function groups. You
will recognize your currently active operating level by
the number on the separation line between the first and
The functions of the USM 35X are combined to form
the second function group.
function groups on three operating levels.
First operating level
If the instrument has the option Data Logger, there is an
additional fourth operation level.

Press the key to change between the operating


levels. Second operating level

Press the key to select the function group shown


above it.

Press the key to select the function shown next Third operating level
to it. The setting of the selected function is carried
out via the right-hand rotary knob.

The gain function is always directly available via the


left-hand rotary knob. H Note:

You can carry out important functions (switch on/off, If the instrument is equipped with the Data Logger op-
dB-step, freeze, zoom and report printout) by pressing tion, a fourth operating level is added. For this, refer to
the special keys (ref. chapter 4). the corresponding chapter Option Data Logger.

You will also find an overview of the function groups


and their functions on the fold-out page.

5-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Overview of the functions

5.1 Overview of the functions Each operating level contains five function groups. You
will recognize your currently active operating level by
the number on the separation line between the first and
The functions of the USM 35X are combined to form
the second function group.
function groups on three operating levels.
First operating level
If the instrument has the option Data Logger, there is an
additional fourth operation level.

Press the key to change between the operating


levels. Second operating level

Press the key to select the function group shown


above it.

Press the key to select the function shown next Third operating level
to it. The setting of the selected function is carried
out via the right-hand rotary knob.

The gain function is always directly available via the


left-hand rotary knob. H Note:

You can carry out important functions (switch on/off, If the instrument is equipped with the Data Logger op-
dB-step, freeze, zoom and report printout) by pressing tion, a fourth operating level is added. For this, refer to
the special keys (ref. chapter 4). the corresponding chapter Option Data Logger.

You will also find an overview of the function groups


and their functions on the fold-out page.

5-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Overview of the functions Operation

Function groups first operating level Function groups second operating level
BASE The functions that you find here are re- CAL This function group makes functions for the
quired for the basic adjustment of the semiautomatic calibration available to you.
screen displays.
REF This function group serves for measuring
PULS Combined in this group are the functions the dB difference between a reference
that serve for the adjustment of pulser. echo and the reflector echo.

RECV Combined in this group are the functions or


that serve for the adjustment of receiver.
AWS This is where you will find all functions for
aGAT All functions for setting the gate A can be the classification of flaws in welds accord-
found in this group. ing to the AWS D1.1 specification.

bGAT All functions for setting the gate B can be or


found in this group.
DAC This is the function group where you can
set the functions for the DAC (only
USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S).

or

JDAC The DAC functions in this function group


are modified to allow for a flaw evaluation
according to JIS (Japanese Industrial
Standard) Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC
and USM 35X S).
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-3

Overview of the functions Operation

Function groups first operating level Function groups second operating level
BASE The functions that you find here are re- CAL This function group makes functions for the
quired for the basic adjustment of the semiautomatic calibration available to you.
screen displays.
REF This function group serves for measuring
PULS Combined in this group are the functions the dB difference between a reference
that serve for the adjustment of pulser. echo and the reflector echo.

RECV Combined in this group are the functions or


that serve for the adjustment of receiver.
AWS This is where you will find all functions for
aGAT All functions for setting the gate A can be the classification of flaws in welds accord-
found in this group. ing to the AWS D1.1 specification.

bGAT All functions for setting the gate B can be or


found in this group.
DAC This is the function group where you can
set the functions for the DAC (only
USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S).

or

JDAC The DAC functions in this function group


are modified to allow for a flaw evaluation
according to JIS (Japanese Industrial
Standard) Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC
and USM 35X S).
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-3
Operation Overview of the functions

or Function groups third operating level


DGS This function group serves for the ampli- MEAS In this group, you can define the measuring
tude evaluation according to the DGS point, select a parameter for the zoomed
method (only USM 35X S). measured-value display in the A-scan as
well as for the setting of the Magnify func-
TRIG Combined in this group are the functions tion, and you can select different settings
required for angle beaming using angle- for the A-scan.
beam probes for the display of a (reduced)
projection distance and depth position of a MSEL This is where you configure your measure-
reflector (for plane-parallel and circular ment line. You can choose one display for
curved test components). each of the four positions.

MEM These functions serve for storing, loading LCD This is the function group where you can
and deleting of data sets. set the LCD contrast and backlight as well
as the echo display mode on the screen.
DATA The functions of this group serve for the
dataset management and documentation. CFG1 Functions for the configuration: unit, dialog
language, printer driver and assignment of
the key

CFG2 Other functions for configuration: time and


date, alarm horn; plus the changeover
between the evaluation modes

5-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Overview of the functions

or Function groups third operating level


DGS This function group serves for the ampli- MEAS In this group, you can define the measuring
tude evaluation according to the DGS point, select a parameter for the zoomed
method (only USM 35X S). measured-value display in the A-scan as
well as for the setting of the Magnify func-
TRIG Combined in this group are the functions tion, and you can select different settings
required for angle beaming using angle- for the A-scan.
beam probes for the display of a (reduced)
projection distance and depth position of a MSEL This is where you configure your measure-
reflector (for plane-parallel and circular ment line. You can choose one display for
curved test components). each of the four positions.

MEM These functions serve for storing, loading LCD This is the function group where you can
and deleting of data sets. set the LCD contrast and backlight as well
as the echo display mode on the screen.
DATA The functions of this group serve for the
dataset management and documentation. CFG1 Functions for the configuration: unit, dialog
language, printer driver and assignment of
the key

CFG2 Other functions for configuration: time and


date, alarm horn; plus the changeover
between the evaluation modes

5-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Setting the gain Operation

5.2 Setting the gain Defining the dB incrementation for gain


You can use the key to select a certain incremen-
This function, operated via the left-hand rotary knob, tation for setting the gain. You have a choice between
enables you to quickly and directly set the gain. 6 steps:
You can use the gain to adjust the required sensitivity 0.0 dB (locked)
in order to control the echo amplitudes. 0.5 dB
Turn the left-hand rotary knob to set the gain. The 1.0 dB
current gain is indicated in the top left corner of the 2.0 dB
screen. 6.0 dB
6.5 20.0 dB

H Note:
The setting 0.0 dB locks the gain in this way preventing
any accidental change of setting.

You can determine the step size of the sixth step using
the function dBSTEP in the function group RECV.

Press to change between the six steps.


The corresponding step size setting is indicated
below the current gain on the screen.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-5

Setting the gain Operation

5.2 Setting the gain Defining the dB incrementation for gain


You can use the key to select a certain incremen-
This function, operated via the left-hand rotary knob, tation for setting the gain. You have a choice between
enables you to quickly and directly set the gain. 6 steps:
You can use the gain to adjust the required sensitivity 0.0 dB (locked)
in order to control the echo amplitudes. 0.5 dB
Turn the left-hand rotary knob to set the gain. The 1.0 dB
current gain is indicated in the top left corner of the 2.0 dB
screen. 6.0 dB
6.5 20.0 dB

H Note:
The setting 0.0 dB locks the gain in this way preventing
any accidental change of setting.

You can determine the step size of the sixth step using
the function dBSTEP in the function group RECV.

Press to change between the six steps.


The corresponding step size setting is indicated
below the current gain on the screen.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-5


Operation Adjusting the display range (function group BASE)

5.3 Adjusting the display range H Note:


(function group BASE) In order to accurately adjust the material velocity and
the probe delay, please read the section Calibrating the
The function group BASE enables you to make the USM 35X, chapter 5.7, beforehand.
basic adjustment of the display range. The display on
the screen must be adjusted for the material to be test- RANGE (Display range)
ed (function MTLVEL) and for the probe used (function
P-DELAY). You can adjust the range for your measurement in
RANGE.
If required, go to the first operating level.
Coarse adjustment:
Select the function group BASE. from 0.5 mm ... 1400 (9999) mm in even steps

Fine adjustment:
up to 9.99 mm in steps of 0.01 mm
up to 99.9 mm in steps of 0.1 mm
up to 999 mm in steps of 1 mm

H Note:
The adjustment range for the display range depends on
the frequency range setting (function FREQU in func-
tion group RECV).

5-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Adjusting the display range (function group BASE)

5.3 Adjusting the display range H Note:


(function group BASE) In order to accurately adjust the material velocity and
the probe delay, please read the section Calibrating the
The function group BASE enables you to make the USM 35X, chapter 5.7, beforehand.
basic adjustment of the display range. The display on
the screen must be adjusted for the material to be test- RANGE (Display range)
ed (function MTLVEL) and for the probe used (function
P-DELAY). You can adjust the range for your measurement in
RANGE.
If required, go to the first operating level.
Coarse adjustment:
Select the function group BASE. from 0.5 mm ... 1400 (9999) mm in even steps

Fine adjustment:
up to 9.99 mm in steps of 0.01 mm
up to 99.9 mm in steps of 0.1 mm
up to 999 mm in steps of 1 mm

H Note:
The adjustment range for the display range depends on
the frequency range setting (function FREQU in func-
tion group RECV).

5-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Adjusting the display range (function group BASE) Operation

Frequency range Adjustment range (c = 5920 m/s) Fine adjustment


0.2 to 1 MHz 0.5 to 9999 mm/0.02" to 390" 1000 ... 15000 in steps of 1 m/s
0.5 to 4 MHz 0.5 to 9999 mm/0.02" to 390"
0.8 to 8 MHz 0.5 to 1420 mm/0.02" to 50"
2 to 20 MHz 0.5 to 1420 mm/0.02" to 50"
A Attention:
Always ensure that the function MTLVEL is correctly
Select the function RANGE. set. The USM 35X calculates all range and distance
indications on the basis of the value adjusted here.
If required, toggle between coarse and fine adjust-
ment. Select the function MTLVEL.
Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand If required, toggle between coarse and fine adjust-
rotary knob. ment.

Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand


MTLVEL (Sound velocity) rotary knob.
Use MTLVEL to set the sound velocity within the test
object. You can use sound velocities between 1000 and D-DELAY (Display starting point)
15000 m/s.
Here you can choose whether to display the adjusted
Coarse adjustment, in steps as follows (m/s):
range (for example 250 mm) starting from the surface
15000 9000 5000 2000
of the test object, or in a section of the test object
14000 8000 4000 1600
starting at a later point. This allows you to shift the
13000 7000 3250 1450
complete screen display and consequently also the
12000 6320 3130 1000
display zero.
11000 6000 3000
10000 5920 2730

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-7

Adjusting the display range (function group BASE) Operation

Frequency range Adjustment range (c = 5920 m/s) Fine adjustment


0.2 to 1 MHz 0.5 to 9999 mm/0.02" to 390" 1000 ... 15000 in steps of 1 m/s
0.5 to 4 MHz 0.5 to 9999 mm/0.02" to 390"
0.8 to 8 MHz 0.5 to 1420 mm/0.02" to 50"
2 to 20 MHz 0.5 to 1420 mm/0.02" to 50"
A Attention:
Always ensure that the function MTLVEL is correctly
Select the function RANGE. set. The USM 35X calculates all range and distance
indications on the basis of the value adjusted here.
If required, toggle between coarse and fine adjust-
ment. Select the function MTLVEL.
Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand If required, toggle between coarse and fine adjust-
rotary knob. ment.

Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand


MTLVEL (Sound velocity) rotary knob.
Use MTLVEL to set the sound velocity within the test
object. You can use sound velocities between 1000 and D-DELAY (Display starting point)
15000 m/s.
Here you can choose whether to display the adjusted
Coarse adjustment, in steps as follows (m/s):
range (for example 250 mm) starting from the surface
15000 9000 5000 2000
of the test object, or in a section of the test object
14000 8000 4000 1600
starting at a later point. This allows you to shift the
13000 7000 3250 1450
complete screen display and consequently also the
12000 6320 3130 1000
display zero.
11000 6000 3000
10000 5920 2730

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-7


Operation Adjusting the display range (function group BASE)

If the display should for example start from the surface of P-DELAY (Probe delay)
the test object, the value in D-DELAY must be set to 0.
Every probe has a delay line between the transducer
Coarse adjustment element and the coupling face. This means that the
10 mm ... 1024 mm/0.3" ... 40" in even steps initial pulse must first pass through this delay line be-
fore the sound wave can enter the test object. You can
Fine adjustment compensate for this influence of the delay line in the
up to 99.9 mm/9.999" in steps of 0.01 mm/0.001" function P-DELAY.
up to 1024 mm/10" in steps of 0.1 mm/0.001"

Select the function D-DELAY. H Note:

If required, toggle between coarse and fine adjust- If the value for P-DELAY is not known, read the section
ment. Calibrating the USM 35X, chapter 5.7, in order to deter-
mine this value.
Adjust the value for the display starting point by
means of the right-hand rotary knob. Select the function P-DELAY.

Adjust the value for the probe delay by means of the


right-hand rotary knob.

5-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Adjusting the display range (function group BASE)

If the display should for example start from the surface of P-DELAY (Probe delay)
the test object, the value in D-DELAY must be set to 0.
Every probe has a delay line between the transducer
Coarse adjustment element and the coupling face. This means that the
10 mm ... 1024 mm/0.3" ... 40" in even steps initial pulse must first pass through this delay line be-
fore the sound wave can enter the test object. You can
Fine adjustment compensate for this influence of the delay line in the
up to 99.9 mm/9.999" in steps of 0.01 mm/0.001" function P-DELAY.
up to 1024 mm/10" in steps of 0.1 mm/0.001"

Select the function D-DELAY. H Note:

If required, toggle between coarse and fine adjust- If the value for P-DELAY is not known, read the section
ment. Calibrating the USM 35X, chapter 5.7, in order to deter-
mine this value.
Adjust the value for the display starting point by
means of the right-hand rotary knob. Select the function P-DELAY.

Adjust the value for the probe delay by means of the


right-hand rotary knob.

5-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Adjusting the pulser (function group PULS) Operation

5.4 Adjusting the pulser DAMPING (Probe matching)


(function group PULS) This function serves for matching the probe. You can
use it to adjust the damping of the probes oscillating
You will find all functions for the adjustment of the puls- circuit and to consequently change the height, width
er in the function group PULS. and resolution of the echo display.

If required, go to the first operating level. low


This setting has a lower damping effect and produc-
Select the function group PULS. es higher and broader echoes.

high
This setting reduces the echo height but mostly also
produces narrow echoes with higher resolution.

Select the function DAMPING.

Set the required value by means of the right-hand


rotary knob.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-9

Adjusting the pulser (function group PULS) Operation

5.4 Adjusting the pulser DAMPING (Probe matching)


(function group PULS) This function serves for matching the probe. You can
use it to adjust the damping of the probes oscillating
You will find all functions for the adjustment of the puls- circuit and to consequently change the height, width
er in the function group PULS. and resolution of the echo display.

If required, go to the first operating level. low


This setting has a lower damping effect and produc-
Select the function group PULS. es higher and broader echoes.

high
This setting reduces the echo height but mostly also
produces narrow echoes with higher resolution.

Select the function DAMPING.

Set the required value by means of the right-hand


rotary knob.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-9


Operation Adjusting the pulser (function group PULS)

POWER (Intensity) DUAL (Pulser-receiver separation)


Use the function POWER to set the pulser voltage. You You can use the function DUAL to activate the pulser-
can choose between two settings: receiver separation.

high high voltage off


Single-element operation; the probe connection
low low voltage sockets are connected in parallel.
The setting high is recommended for all inspections in on
which maximum sensitivity is important, e.g. for the Dual mode for the use with dual-element (TR) probes;
detection of small flaws. Choose the setting low for the left-hand socket (red) is connected with the
broadband probes or if narrow echoes are required (bet- amplifier input whereas the initial pulse is available at
ter lateral resolution). the right-hand socket (black).
Select the function POWER. through
Through-transmission mode for the use with two
Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required
separate probes; the receiver is connected with left
setting.
(red), the pulser is connected with right (black).

Select the function DUAL.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required


setting.

If the DUAL function is active, the LED D (dual) is on.

5-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Adjusting the pulser (function group PULS)

POWER (Intensity) DUAL (Pulser-receiver separation)


Use the function POWER to set the pulser voltage. You You can use the function DUAL to activate the pulser-
can choose between two settings: receiver separation.

high high voltage off


Single-element operation; the probe connection
low low voltage sockets are connected in parallel.
The setting high is recommended for all inspections in on
which maximum sensitivity is important, e.g. for the Dual mode for the use with dual-element (TR) probes;
detection of small flaws. Choose the setting low for the left-hand socket (red) is connected with the
broadband probes or if narrow echoes are required (bet- amplifier input whereas the initial pulse is available at
ter lateral resolution). the right-hand socket (black).
Select the function POWER. through
Through-transmission mode for the use with two
Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required
separate probes; the receiver is connected with left
setting.
(red), the pulser is connected with right (black).

Select the function DUAL.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required


setting.

If the DUAL function is active, the LED D (dual) is on.

5-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Adjusting the pulser (function group PULS) Operation

PRF-MOD(Pulse repetition frequency) 5.5 Adjusting the receiver


The pulse repetition frequency indicates the number of (function group RECV)
times an initial pulse is triggered per second. You can
determine whether you need the highest possible PRF You will find all functions for the adjustment of the puls-
value, or whether you are satisfied with a low value. You er in the function group RECV.
have 10 steps available for the setting; step 1 means
the lowest PRF value. If required, go to the first operating level.

The larger your workpiece, the smaller PRF values are Select the function group RECV.
needed in order to avoid phantom echoes. In the case
of smaller PRF values, however, the A-scan update
rate becomes lower; for this reason, high values are
required if a workpiece should be scanned fast.

The best way to determine the suitable PRF value is by


experimenting: start from the highest step and reduce
the value until there are no more phantom echoes.

Select the function PRF-MOD.

Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand


rotary knob.
H Note:
Double assignment of the function FINE G/dBSTEP
(icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeated-
ly pressing the corresponding key .
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-11

Adjusting the pulser (function group PULS) Operation

PRF-MOD(Pulse repetition frequency) 5.5 Adjusting the receiver


The pulse repetition frequency indicates the number of (function group RECV)
times an initial pulse is triggered per second. You can
determine whether you need the highest possible PRF You will find all functions for the adjustment of the puls-
value, or whether you are satisfied with a low value. You er in the function group RECV.
have 10 steps available for the setting; step 1 means
the lowest PRF value. If required, go to the first operating level.

The larger your workpiece, the smaller PRF values are Select the function group RECV.
needed in order to avoid phantom echoes. In the case
of smaller PRF values, however, the A-scan update
rate becomes lower; for this reason, high values are
required if a workpiece should be scanned fast.

The best way to determine the suitable PRF value is by


experimenting: start from the highest step and reduce
the value until there are no more phantom echoes.

Select the function PRF-MOD.

Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand


rotary knob.
H Note:
Double assignment of the function FINE G/dBSTEP
(icon >). Toggle between the two functions by repeated-
ly pressing the corresponding key .
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-11
Operation Adjusting the receiver (function group RECV)

FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain) REJECT


This function serves for the fine adjustment of the cur- The function REJECT allows you to suppress unwanted
rent gain value. The fine adjustment is possible over a echo indications, for example structural noise from your
range of 40 steps within the range of approx. 4 dB. The test object.
displayed gain value will not change.
The % screen height setting indicates the minimum
Adjustment range: 10 ... +30 height that the echoes should attain in order for them to
be displayed on the screen at all. The Reject setting
Select the function FINE G. cannot be higher than the lowest threshold setting
Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the value for (minus 1 %) of any gate.
the fine gain.
A Attention:
dBSTEP You should handle this function with great caution, as it
may of course happen that you suppress echoes from
Use this function to set a step size for the gain vari-
flaws as well. Many test specifications expressly forbid
ation by means of the key . The value set here is
using the reject function.
subsequently available to you as the sixth step for the
stepwise gain variation. You have a free choice of the Select the function REJECT.
value within the setting range.
Set the required percentage value by means of the
Setting range: 6.5 ... 20 dB right-hand rotary knob.
Select the function dBSTEP. The LED R is therefore lit with active REJECT function.
Set the value for the gain by means of the right-hand
rotary knob.
5-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Adjusting the receiver (function group RECV)

FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain) REJECT


This function serves for the fine adjustment of the cur- The function REJECT allows you to suppress unwanted
rent gain value. The fine adjustment is possible over a echo indications, for example structural noise from your
range of 40 steps within the range of approx. 4 dB. The test object.
displayed gain value will not change.
The % screen height setting indicates the minimum
Adjustment range: 10 ... +30 height that the echoes should attain in order for them to
be displayed on the screen at all. The Reject setting
Select the function FINE G. cannot be higher than the lowest threshold setting
Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the value for (minus 1 %) of any gate.
the fine gain.
A Attention:
dBSTEP You should handle this function with great caution, as it
may of course happen that you suppress echoes from
Use this function to set a step size for the gain vari-
flaws as well. Many test specifications expressly forbid
ation by means of the key . The value set here is
using the reject function.
subsequently available to you as the sixth step for the
stepwise gain variation. You have a free choice of the Select the function REJECT.
value within the setting range.
Set the required percentage value by means of the
Setting range: 6.5 ... 20 dB right-hand rotary knob.
Select the function dBSTEP. The LED R is therefore lit with active REJECT function.
Set the value for the gain by means of the right-hand
rotary knob.
5-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X
Adjusting the receiver (function group RECV) Operation

FREQU (Frequency range) RECTIFY (Rectification)


In this function, you can adjust the operating frequency You can select the rectification mode of the echo puls-
according to the frequency of your probe. es according to your application in the function RECTI-
FY. You have the following options to choose from:
You have a choice between four frequency ranges:
full-w (= full-wave)
0.2 ... 1 MHz All half-waves are displayed above the baseline.
0.5 ... 4 MHz pos hw (= positive half-wave)
Only positive half-waves are displayed.
0.8 ... 8 MHz
neg hw (= negative half-wave)
2 ... 20 MHz
Only negative half-waves are displayed.
Select the function FREQU.
rf (= radio frequency)
Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand Only applies to the display range up to 50 mm (steel).
rotary knob.
Select the function RECTIFY.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required


setting.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-13

Adjusting the receiver (function group RECV) Operation

FREQU (Frequency range) RECTIFY (Rectification)


In this function, you can adjust the operating frequency You can select the rectification mode of the echo puls-
according to the frequency of your probe. es according to your application in the function RECTI-
FY. You have the following options to choose from:
You have a choice between four frequency ranges:
full-w (= full-wave)
0.2 ... 1 MHz All half-waves are displayed above the baseline.
0.5 ... 4 MHz pos hw (= positive half-wave)
Only positive half-waves are displayed.
0.8 ... 8 MHz
neg hw (= negative half-wave)
2 ... 20 MHz
Only negative half-waves are displayed.
Select the function FREQU.
rf (= radio frequency)
Adjust the required value by means of the right-hand Only applies to the display range up to 50 mm (steel).
rotary knob.
Select the function RECTIFY.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required


setting.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-13


Operation Setting the gates (function groups aGAT and bGAT)

5.6 Setting the gates H Note:


(function groups aGAT If you have an instrument equipped with the Data Logger
and bGAT) option at your disposal, youll be additionally able to use
the C gate including all corresponding functions.

All functions for setting the (dual) gate are arranged in


the function group aGAT and bGAT. Tasks of the gates
If required, go to the first operating level. It monitors the range of the test object where you
expect to detect a flaw. If an echo exceeds or falls
Select the function group aGAT or bGAT. below the gate, an alarm signal is output via the
LED A.

The gates A and B are independant of one another.


Gate A can also have the function of an echo-start
gate.

The gate chooses the echo for the digital time-of-


flight or amplitude measurement. The measured
value is indicated in the measurement line.

H Note:
Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circum-
stances. These are caused by intermediate conditions
in instrument operation occuring when the instrument is

5-14 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Setting the gates (function groups aGAT and bGAT)

5.6 Setting the gates H Note:


(function groups aGAT If you have an instrument equipped with the Data Logger
and bGAT) option at your disposal, youll be additionally able to use
the C gate including all corresponding functions.

All functions for setting the (dual) gate are arranged in


the function group aGAT and bGAT. Tasks of the gates
If required, go to the first operating level. It monitors the range of the test object where you
expect to detect a flaw. If an echo exceeds or falls
Select the function group aGAT or bGAT. below the gate, an alarm signal is output via the
LED A.

The gates A and B are independant of one another.


Gate A can also have the function of an echo-start
gate.

The gate chooses the echo for the digital time-of-


flight or amplitude measurement. The measured
value is indicated in the measurement line.

H Note:
Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circum-
stances. These are caused by intermediate conditions
in instrument operation occuring when the instrument is

5-14 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Setting the gates (function groups aGAT and bGAT) Operation

used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Pos- off Evaluation logic off
sible alarms occuring during instrument operation The alarm and measurement capability are switched
(setting of functions) are to be ignored. off. The gate is not visible.
pos Coincidence
Display of gates
The alarm (LED A) is on if the preset response
To make the assignment easier, the gates are displayed threshold of the gate is exceeded within the dis-
in different colors. You cannot vary the colors of gates played range.
because they are fixed as follows:
neg Anticoincidence
Gate A red The alarm (LED A) is on if the preset response
threshold of the gate is not reached within the
Gate B green displayed range.
Gate C blue a trig Triggering by interface echo
When using gate A as echo-start gate (setting of the
evaluation logic for gate B)
Select the function aLOGIC or bLOGIC.
aLOGIC/bLOGIC
(Evaluation logic of the gates) Set the required alarm logic by means of the right-
hand rotary knob.
This function allows you to choose the method for trig-
gering the gate alarm. The alarm is output to the LED A
H Note:
on the front panel of the USM 35X. There are four set-
ting options available: The alarm and measurement function of the gates is
only active within the display range.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-15

Setting the gates (function groups aGAT and bGAT) Operation

used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Pos- off Evaluation logic off
sible alarms occuring during instrument operation The alarm and measurement capability are switched
(setting of functions) are to be ignored. off. The gate is not visible.
pos Coincidence
Display of gates
The alarm (LED A) is on if the preset response
To make the assignment easier, the gates are displayed threshold of the gate is exceeded within the dis-
in different colors. You cannot vary the colors of gates played range.
because they are fixed as follows:
neg Anticoincidence
Gate A red The alarm (LED A) is on if the preset response
threshold of the gate is not reached within the
Gate B green displayed range.
Gate C blue a trig Triggering by interface echo
When using gate A as echo-start gate (setting of the
evaluation logic for gate B)
Select the function aLOGIC or bLOGIC.
aLOGIC/bLOGIC
(Evaluation logic of the gates) Set the required alarm logic by means of the right-
hand rotary knob.
This function allows you to choose the method for trig-
gering the gate alarm. The alarm is output to the LED A
H Note:
on the front panel of the USM 35X. There are four set-
ting options available: The alarm and measurement function of the gates is
only active within the display range.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-15


Operation Setting the gates (function groups aGAT and bGAT)

aSTART/bSTART aTHRSH/bTHRSH (Response and mea-


(Starting points of the gates) surement threshold of the gates)
You can fix the starting point of the gates A or B within You can determine the threshold value of the gates within
the adjustment range of 0 ... 9999 mm/250". the range of 10 to 90 % screen height for triggering the
LED alarm if this value is exceeded or not reached, de-
Select the function aSTART or bSTART. pending on the setting of the aLOGIC/bLOGIC function.
In the RF mode, the threshold can be additionally set
Uuse the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required
from 90 % to 10 %.
setting.
Select the function aTHRSH or bTHRSH.

Set the required value using the right-hand rotary


aWIDTH/bWIDTH (Width of the gates) knob.

You can determine the gate width within the range of


0.2 ... 9999 mm/0.008 ... 250".

Select the function aWIDTH or bWIDTH.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required


value.

5-16 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Setting the gates (function groups aGAT and bGAT)

aSTART/bSTART aTHRSH/bTHRSH (Response and mea-


(Starting points of the gates) surement threshold of the gates)
You can fix the starting point of the gates A or B within You can determine the threshold value of the gates within
the adjustment range of 0 ... 9999 mm/250". the range of 10 to 90 % screen height for triggering the
LED alarm if this value is exceeded or not reached, de-
Select the function aSTART or bSTART. pending on the setting of the aLOGIC/bLOGIC function.
In the RF mode, the threshold can be additionally set
Uuse the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required
from 90 % to 10 %.
setting.
Select the function aTHRSH or bTHRSH.

Set the required value using the right-hand rotary


aWIDTH/bWIDTH (Width of the gates) knob.

You can determine the gate width within the range of


0.2 ... 9999 mm/0.008 ... 250".

Select the function aWIDTH or bWIDTH.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to adjust the required


value.

5-16 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Calibrating the USM 35X Operation

5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X Choosing the measuring point


The sound path measurement in the calibration process
or in the subsequent echo evaluation process depends
Calibrating the display range on the choice of the measuring point which can be set
Before working with the USM 35X, you have to cali- either to flank, to jflank or to peak in the USM 35X. In
brate the instrument: you have to adjust the material principle, the peak measurement should be preferred
velocity and display range and allow for the probe delay because the measured distances do not depend on the
depending on the material and dimensions of the test echo height in that case. However, there are application
object. cases in which the flank measurement is either speci-
fied, or it must be applied for technical reasons, e.g. in
To ensure a safe and proper operation of the USM 35X, many tests using dual-element (TR) probes.
it is necessary that the operator be adequately trained
in the field of ultrasonic testing technology.
A Attention:
Below you will find some examples of common calibra- In any case, the setting of the measuring point must
tion methods for certain test tasks. In addition, the always be identical for the calibration and for the subse-
USM 35X has a semiautomatic calibration function quent test application. Otherwise measurement errors
which is described as Case B: With unknown material might occur.
velocity.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-17

Calibrating the USM 35X Operation

5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X Choosing the measuring point


The sound path measurement in the calibration process
or in the subsequent echo evaluation process depends
Calibrating the display range on the choice of the measuring point which can be set
Before working with the USM 35X, you have to cali- either to flank, to jflank or to peak in the USM 35X. In
brate the instrument: you have to adjust the material principle, the peak measurement should be preferred
velocity and display range and allow for the probe delay because the measured distances do not depend on the
depending on the material and dimensions of the test echo height in that case. However, there are application
object. cases in which the flank measurement is either speci-
fied, or it must be applied for technical reasons, e.g. in
To ensure a safe and proper operation of the USM 35X, many tests using dual-element (TR) probes.
it is necessary that the operator be adequately trained
in the field of ultrasonic testing technology.
A Attention:
Below you will find some examples of common calibra- In any case, the setting of the measuring point must
tion methods for certain test tasks. In addition, the always be identical for the calibration and for the subse-
USM 35X has a semiautomatic calibration function quent test application. Otherwise measurement errors
which is described as Case B: With unknown material might occur.
velocity.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-17


Operation Calibrating the USM 35X

Calibration with straight- and Example:


angle-beam probes You are carrying out the calibration for the calibration
range of 100 mm/5" via the function group BASE using
Case A: With known material velocity
the calibration block V1 (thickness 25 mm/1") which is
Calibration process laid flatwise.

Set the known material velocity in MTLVEL (function Set RANGE to 100 mm/5".
group BASE).
Set the known material velocity of 5920 m/s
Couple the probe to the calibration block. (233 "/ms) in MTLVEL.

Set the required display range in RANGE (function Set the gate so that it is positioned on the first
group BASE). The calibration echo must be dis- calibration echo (from 25 mm/1").
played on the screen.
Read the sound path in the measurement line. If this
Position the gate on one of the calibration echoes value is not equal to 25 mm/1", change the adjust-
until the sound path of the echo is indicated in the ment for the function P-DELAY until it is at 25 mm/1".
measurement line.
This completes the calibration of the USM 35X to the
After this, change the adjustment of the function material velocity of 5920 m/s (233 "/ms) with a calibra-
P-DELAY (function group BASE) until the correct tion range of 100 mm/5" for the probe used.
sound path for the selected calibration echo is
indicated in the measurement line.

5-18 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Calibrating the USM 35X

Calibration with straight- and Example:


angle-beam probes You are carrying out the calibration for the calibration
range of 100 mm/5" via the function group BASE using
Case A: With known material velocity
the calibration block V1 (thickness 25 mm/1") which is
Calibration process laid flatwise.

Set the known material velocity in MTLVEL (function Set RANGE to 100 mm/5".
group BASE).
Set the known material velocity of 5920 m/s
Couple the probe to the calibration block. (233 "/ms) in MTLVEL.

Set the required display range in RANGE (function Set the gate so that it is positioned on the first
group BASE). The calibration echo must be dis- calibration echo (from 25 mm/1").
played on the screen.
Read the sound path in the measurement line. If this
Position the gate on one of the calibration echoes value is not equal to 25 mm/1", change the adjust-
until the sound path of the echo is indicated in the ment for the function P-DELAY until it is at 25 mm/1".
measurement line.
This completes the calibration of the USM 35X to the
After this, change the adjustment of the function material velocity of 5920 m/s (233 "/ms) with a calibra-
P-DELAY (function group BASE) until the correct tion range of 100 mm/5" for the probe used.
sound path for the selected calibration echo is
indicated in the measurement line.

5-18 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Calibrating the USM 35X Operation

Case B: With unknown material velocity Calibration process


Use the semiautomatic calibration function of the Set the required display range in RANGE (function
USM 35X via the function group CAL for this calibration group BASE). The two calibraion echoes selected
case. must be displayed on the screen. Set the range so
that the second calibration echo is located on the
right edge of the screen.

Select the function group CAL.

Enter the distances of the two calibation echoes in


S-REF1 and S-REF2.

Position the gate (function aSTART) on the first


calibration echo.

Press to record the first calibration echo.

The distances between 2 calibration echoes must be The recording of the first calibration echo is con-
entered as default data. The USM 35X will then carry firmed by the message Echo is recorded, and the
out a plausibility check, calculate the material velocity function CAL indicates the value 1.
and the probe delay, and automatically set the parame-
ters. Move the gate to the second calibration echo.

Press to record the second calibration echo.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-19

Calibrating the USM 35X Operation

Case B: With unknown material velocity Calibration process


Use the semiautomatic calibration function of the Set the required display range in RANGE (function
USM 35X via the function group CAL for this calibration group BASE). The two calibraion echoes selected
case. must be displayed on the screen. Set the range so
that the second calibration echo is located on the
right edge of the screen.

Select the function group CAL.

Enter the distances of the two calibation echoes in


S-REF1 and S-REF2.

Position the gate (function aSTART) on the first


calibration echo.

Press to record the first calibration echo.

The distances between 2 calibration echoes must be The recording of the first calibration echo is con-
entered as default data. The USM 35X will then carry firmed by the message Echo is recorded, and the
out a plausibility check, calculate the material velocity function CAL indicates the value 1.
and the probe delay, and automatically set the parame-
ters. Move the gate to the second calibration echo.

Press to record the second calibration echo.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-19


Operation Calibrating the USM 35X

The correct calibration is confirmed by the message Example


Calibration is done.
Enter the distances (thicknesses) of the two calibra-
The USM 35X will now automatically determine the tion lines S-REF1 (20 mm) and S-REF2 (40 mm).
sound velocity and the probe delay and set the corre-
sponding functions accordingly. The value of the func-
tion CAL jumps back to 0.

H Note:
If the instrument is not able to carry out any valid cali-
bration on the basis of the input values and the echoes
recorded, a corresponding error message is displayed.
In that case, please check the values of your calibra-
Position the gate on the first calibration echo.
tion lines and repeat the process of recording the cali-
bration echoes. Press to record the first calibration echo.

5-20 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Calibrating the USM 35X

The correct calibration is confirmed by the message Example


Calibration is done.
Enter the distances (thicknesses) of the two calibra-
The USM 35X will now automatically determine the tion lines S-REF1 (20 mm) and S-REF2 (40 mm).
sound velocity and the probe delay and set the corre-
sponding functions accordingly. The value of the func-
tion CAL jumps back to 0.

H Note:
If the instrument is not able to carry out any valid cali-
bration on the basis of the input values and the echoes
recorded, a corresponding error message is displayed.
In that case, please check the values of your calibra-
Position the gate on the first calibration echo.
tion lines and repeat the process of recording the cali-
bration echoes. Press to record the first calibration echo.

5-20 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Calibrating the USM 35X Operation

Position the gate on the second calibration echo: Calibration with dual-element (TR) probes
Dual-element (TR) probes are especially used for wall
thickness measurement. The following peculiarities
must be taken into account when using these probes:

Echo flank
Most dual-element (TR) probes have a roof angle
(transducer elements with inclined orientation toward
the test surface). This causes mode conversions both
at beam index (sound entry into the material) and at the
Press . reflection from the backwall, which can result in very
The second echo is stored, the calibration is carried jagged echoes.
out, and the CAL function is reset to 0. The valid cali-
bration is briefly confirmed and carried out. V-path error
Dual-element (TR) probes produce a v-shaped sound
If you select the function group BASE, you can read path from the pulser via the reflection from the backwall
the material velocity and probe delay. to the receiver element. This so-called V-path error
affects the measuring accuracy. You should therefore
choose two wall thicknesses that cover the expected
thickness measurement range for the calibration. In this
way, the V-path error can be corrected to the greatest
possible extent.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-21

Calibrating the USM 35X Operation

Position the gate on the second calibration echo: Calibration with dual-element (TR) probes
Dual-element (TR) probes are especially used for wall
thickness measurement. The following peculiarities
must be taken into account when using these probes:

Echo flank
Most dual-element (TR) probes have a roof angle
(transducer elements with inclined orientation toward
the test surface). This causes mode conversions both
at beam index (sound entry into the material) and at the
Press . reflection from the backwall, which can result in very
The second echo is stored, the calibration is carried jagged echoes.
out, and the CAL function is reset to 0. The valid cali-
bration is briefly confirmed and carried out. V-path error
Dual-element (TR) probes produce a v-shaped sound
If you select the function group BASE, you can read path from the pulser via the reflection from the backwall
the material velocity and probe delay. to the receiver element. This so-called V-path error
affects the measuring accuracy. You should therefore
choose two wall thicknesses that cover the expected
thickness measurement range for the calibration. In this
way, the V-path error can be corrected to the greatest
possible extent.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-21


Operation Calibrating the USM 35X

Higher material velocity Set the pulser and receiver functions according to
the probe used and the test application.
Due to the V-path error, a higher material velocity than
that of the test material is given during calibration, es- Set the function TOF (function group MEAS) to
pecially with small thicknesses. This is typical of dual- flank.
element (TR) probes and serves for compensation of
the V-path error. Vary the gain so that the highest echo reaches
approximately the full screen height.
With small wall thicknesses, the above-described effect
leads to an echo amplitude drop which has to be espe- Set the gate threshold to the required height for
cially taken into account with thicknesses less than measuring the sound paths at the echo flanks.
2 mm/0.08".
Select the function group CAL.
A stepped reference block having different wall thick-
nesses is required for calibration. The wall thicknesses Enter the distances of the two calibration echoes in
must be selected so that they cover the expected read- S-REF1 and S-REF2.
ings. Position the gate (function aSTART) on the first
calibration echo.
Calibration process:
We recommend to use the semiautomatic calibration Press to record the first calibration echo.
function for the calibration with T/R probes. Couple the probe to the calibration block containing
Set the required test range. the second calibration line, and set the height so that
its about as high as the first calibration echo.
Increase the probe delay (P-DELAY) until the two
calibration lines are displayed within the range. Move the gate to the second calibration echo.

5-22 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Calibrating the USM 35X

Higher material velocity Set the pulser and receiver functions according to
the probe used and the test application.
Due to the V-path error, a higher material velocity than
that of the test material is given during calibration, es- Set the function TOF (function group MEAS) to
pecially with small thicknesses. This is typical of dual- flank.
element (TR) probes and serves for compensation of
the V-path error. Vary the gain so that the highest echo reaches
approximately the full screen height.
With small wall thicknesses, the above-described effect
leads to an echo amplitude drop which has to be espe- Set the gate threshold to the required height for
cially taken into account with thicknesses less than measuring the sound paths at the echo flanks.
2 mm/0.08".
Select the function group CAL.
A stepped reference block having different wall thick-
nesses is required for calibration. The wall thicknesses Enter the distances of the two calibration echoes in
must be selected so that they cover the expected read- S-REF1 and S-REF2.
ings. Position the gate (function aSTART) on the first
calibration echo.
Calibration process:
We recommend to use the semiautomatic calibration Press to record the first calibration echo.
function for the calibration with T/R probes. Couple the probe to the calibration block containing
Set the required test range. the second calibration line, and set the height so that
its about as high as the first calibration echo.
Increase the probe delay (P-DELAY) until the two
calibration lines are displayed within the range. Move the gate to the second calibration echo.

5-22 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Calibrating the USM 35X Operation

Press to record the second calibration echo. 5.8 Measuring


The correct calibration is confirmed by the message
Calibration is done. The material velocity and
probe delay are set. The value of the CAL function General notes
goes back to 0. Please pay attention to the following notes when mea-
suring with the USM 35X.
If necessary, check the calibration on one or several
known calibration lines, e.g. using the stepped Condition for measurements is the correct instrument
reference block VW. calibration (sound velocity, probe delay).
All amplitude measurements are carried out at the
H Note: highest or the first signal in the gate.
Always keep in mind that the measured value is deter- All distance measurements are carried out at the
mined at the intersection point of gate and echo flank intersection point of gate and the first echo flank
when the function TOF was set to flank. A correct set- (TOF = flank or jflank), or at the peak of the highest
ting of the echo height and gate threshold is therefore echo (TOF = peak).
decisive for accurate calibration and measurement!
If the echo amplitudes do not succeed 5 % screen
Calibrations or measurements in the peak mode are height all sound path and amplitude measurements
mostly not possible when using dual-element (TR) will be suppressed. Thus, rapidly changing random
probes. As the echoes are often very broad and jagged, measurements caused by the instruments back-
a clear echo peak cannot always be found in these ground noise are avoided.
cases.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-23

Calibrating the USM 35X Operation

Press to record the second calibration echo. 5.8 Measuring


The correct calibration is confirmed by the message
Calibration is done. The material velocity and
probe delay are set. The value of the CAL function General notes
goes back to 0. Please pay attention to the following notes when mea-
suring with the USM 35X.
If necessary, check the calibration on one or several
known calibration lines, e.g. using the stepped Condition for measurements is the correct instrument
reference block VW. calibration (sound velocity, probe delay).
All amplitude measurements are carried out at the
H Note: highest or the first signal in the gate.
Always keep in mind that the measured value is deter- All distance measurements are carried out at the
mined at the intersection point of gate and echo flank intersection point of gate and the first echo flank
when the function TOF was set to flank. A correct set- (TOF = flank or jflank), or at the peak of the highest
ting of the echo height and gate threshold is therefore echo (TOF = peak).
decisive for accurate calibration and measurement!
If the echo amplitudes do not succeed 5 % screen
Calibrations or measurements in the peak mode are height all sound path and amplitude measurements
mostly not possible when using dual-element (TR) will be suppressed. Thus, rapidly changing random
probes. As the echoes are often very broad and jagged, measurements caused by the instruments back-
a clear echo peak cannot always be found in these ground noise are avoided.
cases.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-23


Operation Measuring

The following example shows the dependency of dis-


tance measurement on the echo waveform, i.e. on the
height of the gate threshold and thus on the selection of
the intersection point at the signal.

H Note:
The point of amplitude measurement is marked with a
small upward triangle on the corresponding gate bar.
The point of distance measurement is marked with a
small downward triangle.

Gate threshold at 80 %
measured sound path: 24.91 mm

Gate threshold at 20 %
measured sound path: 24.44 mm
5-24 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Measuring

The following example shows the dependency of dis-


tance measurement on the echo waveform, i.e. on the
height of the gate threshold and thus on the selection of
the intersection point at the signal.

H Note:
The point of amplitude measurement is marked with a
small upward triangle on the corresponding gate bar.
The point of distance measurement is marked with a
small downward triangle.

Gate threshold at 80 %
measured sound path: 24.91 mm

Gate threshold at 20 %
measured sound path: 24.44 mm
5-24 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X
Measurement of dB difference (function group REF) Operation

5.9 Measurement of dB difference H Note:

(function group REF) Depending on the setting in the function EVAMOD


(function group CFG2), one of the function groups
AWS, DAC, JDAC, or DGS may also be displayed at
You can evaluate reflector echoes by means of refer-
this point. Please also refer to chapter 5.15 General
ence echoes. The function group REF makes all func-
configuration.
tions for the echo comparison between a reflector echo
and a reference echo available to you. You will find the following function:
If required, go to the second operating level. REFECHO Storing or deleting the reference echo
Select the function group REF. REFMOD Activating the measurement of
dB difference

aSTART Positioning the A gate

The functions are described in the order in which you


need them during your work.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-25

Measurement of dB difference (function group REF) Operation

5.9 Measurement of dB difference H Note:

(function group REF) Depending on the setting in the function EVAMOD


(function group CFG2), one of the function groups
AWS, DAC, JDAC, or DGS may also be displayed at
You can evaluate reflector echoes by means of refer-
this point. Please also refer to chapter 5.15 General
ence echoes. The function group REF makes all func-
configuration.
tions for the echo comparison between a reflector echo
and a reference echo available to you. You will find the following function:
If required, go to the second operating level. REFECHO Storing or deleting the reference echo
Select the function group REF. REFMOD Activating the measurement of
dB difference

aSTART Positioning the A gate

The functions are described in the order in which you


need them during your work.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-25


Operation Measurement of dB difference (function group REF)

Recording a reference echo


Before using the measurement of dB difference, you
have to first record a reference echo.

A Attention:
When recording a reference echo, an already stored
reference echo is overwritten after a corresponding
warning.

Peak the reference echo according to the test


specification.

Position the A gate over the reference echo using the


function aSTART.

Select the function REFECHO. Deleting a reference echo


Turn the right-hand rotary knob upward in order to You can delete stored reference echoes.
store the echo in gate A as a reference echo. Select the function REFECHO.
If necessary, confirm the warning message in order Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward in order to
to overwrite a stored reference echo. delete the reference echo.
The reference echo is now recorded. An inverted R is If necessary, confirm the warning message in order
shown in the measurement line. to delete the stored reference echo.

5-26 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Measurement of dB difference (function group REF)

Recording a reference echo


Before using the measurement of dB difference, you
have to first record a reference echo.

A Attention:
When recording a reference echo, an already stored
reference echo is overwritten after a corresponding
warning.

Peak the reference echo according to the test


specification.

Position the A gate over the reference echo using the


function aSTART.

Select the function REFECHO. Deleting a reference echo


Turn the right-hand rotary knob upward in order to You can delete stored reference echoes.
store the echo in gate A as a reference echo. Select the function REFECHO.
If necessary, confirm the warning message in order Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward in order to
to overwrite a stored reference echo. delete the reference echo.
The reference echo is now recorded. An inverted R is If necessary, confirm the warning message in order
shown in the measurement line. to delete the stored reference echo.

5-26 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Measurement of dB difference(function group REF) Operation

Echo comparison
You can compare the echo of any reflector of your
choice with the reference echo. The displayed result is
the dB difference of the two echoes.

H Note:
The dB difference is independent of any possible gain
variation.

Choose Ha dB or Hb dB as measured value.

Position the A gate over the echo.

Select the function REFMOD.

Activate the function by means of the right-hand


rotary knob.

The dB difference between the reference echo and


the reflector echo is now displayed as the measured
value.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-27

Measurement of dB difference(function group REF) Operation

Echo comparison
You can compare the echo of any reflector of your
choice with the reference echo. The displayed result is
the dB difference of the two echoes.

H Note:
The dB difference is independent of any possible gain
variation.

Choose Ha dB or Hb dB as measured value.

Position the A gate over the echo.

Select the function REFMOD.

Activate the function by means of the right-hand


rotary knob.

The dB difference between the reference echo and


the reflector echo is now displayed as the measured
value.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-27


Operation Classification of welds (function group AWS)

5.10 Classification of welds H Note:


(function group AWS) Double assignment of the function INDICA/aSTART.
Press the corresponding key repeatedly to toggle
You can rate flaws in welds according to the specifica- between the functions.
tion AWS D1.1. You will find the corresponding functions
in the function group AWS. H Note:

If necessary, change to the second operation level. Depending on the setting in the function EVAMOD
(function group CFG2), one of the function groups REF,
Select the function group AWS. DAC, JDAC, or DGS may also be displayed at this
point. Please also refer to chapter 5.15 General configu-
ration.

Rating of welds according to AWS


The rating of flaws in welds according to the AWS
specifications is based on an evaluation of the signal
amplitude. In this process, the echo amplitude of the
flaw echo is compared with the echo amplitude of a
known reference reflector. In addition, the sound attenu-
ation in the workpiece is also taken into consideration.
The result is a dB value which is called flaw rating. The
flaw rating D is calculated according to the formula:

5-28 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Classification of welds (function group AWS)

5.10 Classification of welds H Note:


(function group AWS) Double assignment of the function INDICA/aSTART.
Press the corresponding key repeatedly to toggle
You can rate flaws in welds according to the specifica- between the functions.
tion AWS D1.1. You will find the corresponding functions
in the function group AWS. H Note:

If necessary, change to the second operation level. Depending on the setting in the function EVAMOD
(function group CFG2), one of the function groups REF,
Select the function group AWS. DAC, JDAC, or DGS may also be displayed at this
point. Please also refer to chapter 5.15 General configu-
ration.

Rating of welds according to AWS


The rating of flaws in welds according to the AWS
specifications is based on an evaluation of the signal
amplitude. In this process, the echo amplitude of the
flaw echo is compared with the echo amplitude of a
known reference reflector. In addition, the sound attenu-
ation in the workpiece is also taken into consideration.
The result is a dB value which is called flaw rating. The
flaw rating D is calculated according to the formula:

5-28 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Classification of welds (function group AWS) Operation

D=ABC H Notes:

with: Make sure that all instrument options for the special
test are calibrated before starting with the rating ac-
A = Indication (in dB) cording to AWS.
Absolute instrument gain with which the maximum
flaw echo is at 50 % (5 %) echo height Pay attention to peaking an echo with an amplitude
between 45 % and 55 % screen height. A rating is not
B = Reference (in dB) possible with other amplitudes.
Absolute instrument gain with which the maximum
reference echo (1.5 mm side-drilled hole from the Apply couplant, and couple the probe to the refer-
reference block 1) is at 50 % (5 %) echo height ence block 1. Peak the echo from the 1.5 mm side-
drilled hole.
C = Attenuation (in dB)
This value is calculated according to the formula Select the function aSTART, and set up the A gate
C = 0.079 dB/mm (s 25.4 mm). With s = sound on the reference echo.
path of the flaw echo.
Vary the gain so that the reference echo is displayed
The sound attenuation correction is automatically at 50 % screen height.
calculated and displayed by the instrument. For
Choose the function REFRNCE, and confirm the
sound paths smaller than or equal to 25.4 mm
choice in order to save the reference gain.
(1 inch), the value is set to zero.

D = D 1.1 Rating (in dB)


This is the result of the evaluation according to AWS.
The evaluation is carried out in the USM 35X accord-
ing to the formula indicated above.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-29

Classification of welds (function group AWS) Operation

D=ABC H Notes:

with: Make sure that all instrument options for the special
test are calibrated before starting with the rating ac-
A = Indication (in dB) cording to AWS.
Absolute instrument gain with which the maximum
flaw echo is at 50 % (5 %) echo height Pay attention to peaking an echo with an amplitude
between 45 % and 55 % screen height. A rating is not
B = Reference (in dB) possible with other amplitudes.
Absolute instrument gain with which the maximum
reference echo (1.5 mm side-drilled hole from the Apply couplant, and couple the probe to the refer-
reference block 1) is at 50 % (5 %) echo height ence block 1. Peak the echo from the 1.5 mm side-
drilled hole.
C = Attenuation (in dB)
This value is calculated according to the formula Select the function aSTART, and set up the A gate
C = 0.079 dB/mm (s 25.4 mm). With s = sound on the reference echo.
path of the flaw echo.
Vary the gain so that the reference echo is displayed
The sound attenuation correction is automatically at 50 % screen height.
calculated and displayed by the instrument. For
Choose the function REFRNCE, and confirm the
sound paths smaller than or equal to 25.4 mm
choice in order to save the reference gain.
(1 inch), the value is set to zero.

D = D 1.1 Rating (in dB)


This is the result of the evaluation according to AWS.
The evaluation is carried out in the USM 35X accord-
ing to the formula indicated above.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-29


Operation Classification of welds (function group AWS)

Save the current gain using the function INDICA. The


current gain is saved. The USM 35X will automatical-
ly determine the values of the AWS variables C and
D. You can then evaluate the rating D using the
corresponding requirements from AWS.

Couple the probe to the test object in order to evalu-


ate a flaw echo.

Select the function aSTART, and set up the A gate


on the flaw echo.

Vary the gain so that the flaw echo is displayed at


50 % screen height.

Go to the function group AWS.

5-30 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Classification of welds (function group AWS)

Save the current gain using the function INDICA. The


current gain is saved. The USM 35X will automatical-
ly determine the values of the AWS variables C and
D. You can then evaluate the rating D using the
corresponding requirements from AWS.

Couple the probe to the test object in order to evalu-


ate a flaw echo.

Select the function aSTART, and set up the A gate


on the flaw echo.

Vary the gain so that the flaw echo is displayed at


50 % screen height.

Go to the function group AWS.

5-30 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Calculation of flaw position (function group TRIG) Operation

5.11 Calculation of flaw position H Note:


(function group TRIG) Double assignment of the function X-VALU/COLOR.
Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press-
In the function group TRIG you will find the functions for ing the corresponding key .
setting the flaw position calculation when using angle- The functions in the group TRIG enable to automatically
beam probes. calculate the (reduced) projection distance and the real
If required, go to the first operating level. depth of the flaw in addition to the sound path S, and to
digitally display them in the measurement line.
Select the function group TRIG.
Projection distance PD:
distance of probe index (sound exit point) from the
position of the flaw, projected on the surface

Reduced projection distance rPD:


distance of the probes leading face from the position
of the flaw, projected on the surface

Depth d:
Distance between flaw position and surface

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-31

Calculation of flaw position (function group TRIG) Operation

5.11 Calculation of flaw position H Note:


(function group TRIG) Double assignment of the function X-VALU/COLOR.
Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press-
In the function group TRIG you will find the functions for ing the corresponding key .
setting the flaw position calculation when using angle- The functions in the group TRIG enable to automatically
beam probes. calculate the (reduced) projection distance and the real
If required, go to the first operating level. depth of the flaw in addition to the sound path S, and to
digitally display them in the measurement line.
Select the function group TRIG.
Projection distance PD:
distance of probe index (sound exit point) from the
position of the flaw, projected on the surface

Reduced projection distance rPD:


distance of the probes leading face from the position
of the flaw, projected on the surface

Depth d:
Distance between flaw position and surface

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-31


Operation Calculation of flaw position (function group TRIG)

ANGLE (Angle of incidence)


The ANGLE function enables you to adjust the angle of
incidence of your probe for the material used. This val-
ue is required for the automatic calculation of the flaw
position.

Adjustment range: 0 ... 90

Select the ANGLE function.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required


setting.

When using angle-beam probes, the instrument can X-VALUE (X-value of the probe)
additionally calculate the sound path section or so-
called leg L up to the next reflection point. This sound The function X-VALUE enables you to set the X-value
path section or leg can be displayed as the measured (distance between the probes leading face and probe
value La, Lb, or Lc. index/sound exit point) of the probe used. This value is
required for the automatic calculation of the reduced
projection distance.

Adjustment range: 0 ... 100 mm/0 ... 40"

Select the function X-VALUE.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required value.

5-32 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Calculation of flaw position (function group TRIG)

ANGLE (Angle of incidence)


The ANGLE function enables you to adjust the angle of
incidence of your probe for the material used. This val-
ue is required for the automatic calculation of the flaw
position.

Adjustment range: 0 ... 90

Select the ANGLE function.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required


setting.

When using angle-beam probes, the instrument can X-VALUE (X-value of the probe)
additionally calculate the sound path section or so-
called leg L up to the next reflection point. This sound The function X-VALUE enables you to set the X-value
path section or leg can be displayed as the measured (distance between the probes leading face and probe
value La, Lb, or Lc. index/sound exit point) of the probe used. This value is
required for the automatic calculation of the reduced
projection distance.

Adjustment range: 0 ... 100 mm/0 ... 40"

Select the function X-VALUE.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required value.

5-32 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Calculation of flaw position (function group TRIG) Operation

COLOR Select the THICKNE function.


To make the orientation easier, the instrument is able to Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required value.
display the different sound path sections or legs in dif-
ferent ways. You can choose between two display modes:
DIAMET (Outside diameter of the test object)
1 The A-scan is shown in another color in every leg. You will need the DIAMET function for tests on circular
Leg 1 in magenta curved surfaces, for example when testing longitudinal-
Leg 2 in blue ly welded tubes. In order to make the USM 35X carry
Leg 3 in magenta out the corresponding correction of (reduced) projection
2 The legs are shown as background shadings. distance and depth, you should enter the outside diam-
eter of your test object in this function.
off No legs are displayed.
If you plan to carry out the flaw position calculation for
Select the function COLOR. plane-parallel (flat) test objects, the DIAMET function
should be set to flat.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required
mode. Adjustment range:

10 ... 2000 mm/0.4 ... 800"


THICKNE (Material thickness)
flat
Use the THICKNE function to set the materials wall
thickness. This value is required for the automatic cal- Select the DIAMET function.
culation of the real depth.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required
Adjustment range: 1 ... 1000 mm/0.05 ... 400" value.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-33

Calculation of flaw position (function group TRIG) Operation

COLOR Select the THICKNE function.


To make the orientation easier, the instrument is able to Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required value.
display the different sound path sections or legs in dif-
ferent ways. You can choose between two display modes:
DIAMET (Outside diameter of the test object)
1 The A-scan is shown in another color in every leg. You will need the DIAMET function for tests on circular
Leg 1 in magenta curved surfaces, for example when testing longitudinal-
Leg 2 in blue ly welded tubes. In order to make the USM 35X carry
Leg 3 in magenta out the corresponding correction of (reduced) projection
2 The legs are shown as background shadings. distance and depth, you should enter the outside diam-
eter of your test object in this function.
off No legs are displayed.
If you plan to carry out the flaw position calculation for
Select the function COLOR. plane-parallel (flat) test objects, the DIAMET function
should be set to flat.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required
mode. Adjustment range:

10 ... 2000 mm/0.4 ... 800"


THICKNE (Material thickness)
flat
Use the THICKNE function to set the materials wall
thickness. This value is required for the automatic cal- Select the DIAMET function.
culation of the real depth.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required
Adjustment range: 1 ... 1000 mm/0.05 ... 400" value.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-33


Operation Data saving (function group MEM)

5.12 Data saving A data set contains all instrument settings as well as
the A-scan. This means that whenever you recall a
(function group MEM) stored data set, your instrument is again set up exactly
the same as it was at the moment when the data set
You will find all functions for storing, recalling and delet- was stored. This makes each one of your tests repro-
ing complete data sets in the function group MEM. ducible.
If required, go to the second operating level. You will find the following functions:
Select the function group MEM. SET-# selecting number of a data set

RECALL recalling a stored data set

STORE storing a data set

DELETE deleting a data set

The functions are described in the order in which you


need them during your work.

5-34 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Data saving (function group MEM)

5.12 Data saving A data set contains all instrument settings as well as
the A-scan. This means that whenever you recall a
(function group MEM) stored data set, your instrument is again set up exactly
the same as it was at the moment when the data set
You will find all functions for storing, recalling and delet- was stored. This makes each one of your tests repro-
ing complete data sets in the function group MEM. ducible.
If required, go to the second operating level. You will find the following functions:
Select the function group MEM. SET-# selecting number of a data set

RECALL recalling a stored data set

STORE storing a data set

DELETE deleting a data set

The functions are described in the order in which you


need them during your work.

5-34 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Data saving (function group MEM) Operation

Storing a data set All active entries in the information table (TESTINF) are
automatically allocated to the data set being stored
You can save your current setup to a data set. (see chapter 5.13 Dataset management).
Select the function SET-#.
Deleting a data set
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number
where you would want to store the current data set An occupied data set is marked with an asterisk (*)
(1 to 200). before the data set number. You can delete these data
sets if you no longer need them.
Select the function STORE.
Select the function SET-#.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number of
The USM 35X stores the current data set. When the the data set that you want to delete.
storage process is completed, the function STORE is
automatically reset to off. Select the function DELETE.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The


H Note: measurement line will then prompt: Delete data set?
The asterisk (*) before a selected data set number indi-
Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one
cates that this data set is already occupied. It is not
more time (all other keys would abort the process).
possible to overwrite an occupied data set; select an-
other data set which is still empty, or delete the occu- The data set is now deleted; the asterisk preceding
pied data set. To avoid loss of data e.g. in case of a the data set number is no longer there. The function
software update you should save the data sets to a PC. DELETE is automatically reset to off.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-35

Data saving (function group MEM) Operation

Storing a data set All active entries in the information table (TESTINF) are
automatically allocated to the data set being stored
You can save your current setup to a data set. (see chapter 5.13 Dataset management).
Select the function SET-#.
Deleting a data set
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number
where you would want to store the current data set An occupied data set is marked with an asterisk (*)
(1 to 200). before the data set number. You can delete these data
sets if you no longer need them.
Select the function STORE.
Select the function SET-#.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number of
The USM 35X stores the current data set. When the the data set that you want to delete.
storage process is completed, the function STORE is
automatically reset to off. Select the function DELETE.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The


H Note: measurement line will then prompt: Delete data set?
The asterisk (*) before a selected data set number indi-
Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one
cates that this data set is already occupied. It is not
more time (all other keys would abort the process).
possible to overwrite an occupied data set; select an-
other data set which is still empty, or delete the occu- The data set is now deleted; the asterisk preceding
pied data set. To avoid loss of data e.g. in case of a the data set number is no longer there. The function
software update you should save the data sets to a PC. DELETE is automatically reset to off.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-35


Operation Data saving (function group MEM)

Deleting all data set Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The
measurement line will then prompt: Delete all data
You can delete all data sets if you no longer need them. sets?
Select the function DELETE. Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one
more time (all other keys would abort the process).

All data sets are now deleted. The function DELETE is


automatically reset to off.

Recalling a stored data set


You can recall a stored data set; your instrument will
then be provided with all the test-relevant technical
features that existed at the moment of the setup. A
frozen display of the stored A-scan appears.

H Note: A Attention:
Double assignment of the function DELETE/DELALL.
If a saved data set is loaded, the current instrument
Press the corresponding key repeatedly to toggle
setup is lost. If necessary, save the current instrument
between the functions.
setup to a new data set before loading a saved data
set.

Select the function SET-#.

5-36 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Data saving (function group MEM)

Deleting all data set Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The
measurement line will then prompt: Delete all data
You can delete all data sets if you no longer need them. sets?
Select the function DELETE. Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one
more time (all other keys would abort the process).

All data sets are now deleted. The function DELETE is


automatically reset to off.

Recalling a stored data set


You can recall a stored data set; your instrument will
then be provided with all the test-relevant technical
features that existed at the moment of the setup. A
frozen display of the stored A-scan appears.

H Note: A Attention:
Double assignment of the function DELETE/DELALL.
If a saved data set is loaded, the current instrument
Press the corresponding key repeatedly to toggle
setup is lost. If necessary, save the current instrument
between the functions.
setup to a new data set before loading a saved data
set.

Select the function SET-#.

5-36 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Data saving (function group MEM) Operation

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number of


the data set that you want to recall.

Select the function RECALL.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The


measurement line will then prompt: Recall data set?

Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one


more time (all other keys would abort the process).

The data set is now loaded and the current setup is


overwritten. When the loading process is completed, the
function RECALL is automatically reset to off.

H Note:
The gate for surveying the echo can be moved in the
recalled A-scan. However, as the evaluation is made in
the frozen A-scan, the measurement resolution is only
0.5 % of the adjusted calibration range.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-37

Data saving (function group MEM) Operation

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the number of


the data set that you want to recall.

Select the function RECALL.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set it to on. The


measurement line will then prompt: Recall data set?

Confirm by pressing the corresponding key one


more time (all other keys would abort the process).

The data set is now loaded and the current setup is


overwritten. When the loading process is completed, the
function RECALL is automatically reset to off.

H Note:
The gate for surveying the echo can be moved in the
recalled A-scan. However, as the evaluation is made in
the frozen A-scan, the measurement resolution is only
0.5 % of the adjusted calibration range.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-37


Operation Dataset management (function group DATA)

5.13 Dataset management The functions in the function group DATA enable you to
easily manage the data sets stored in the USM 35X.
(function group DATA)
The following functions are available:
The USM 35X offers comprehensive functions for an
TESTINF You can save a lot of additional informa-
easy dataset management.
tion for every data set, e.g. data on the
If required, go to the second operating level. test object, on the flaw detected, or com-
ments.
Select the function group DATA.
PREVIEW In this dataset preview you will see the
A-scan, the dataset name and the storage
date of each data set.

DIR This function enables you to display a list


of all stored data sets, including the corre-
sponding dataset names.

SETTING This is where you will see a list of func-


tions including all settings of the current
data set.

5-38 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Dataset management (function group DATA)

5.13 Dataset management The functions in the function group DATA enable you to
easily manage the data sets stored in the USM 35X.
(function group DATA)
The following functions are available:
The USM 35X offers comprehensive functions for an
TESTINF You can save a lot of additional informa-
easy dataset management.
tion for every data set, e.g. data on the
If required, go to the second operating level. test object, on the flaw detected, or com-
ments.
Select the function group DATA.
PREVIEW In this dataset preview you will see the
A-scan, the dataset name and the storage
date of each data set.

DIR This function enables you to display a list


of all stored data sets, including the corre-
sponding dataset names.

SETTING This is where you will see a list of func-


tions including all settings of the current
data set.

5-38 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Dataset management (function group DATA) Operation

TESTINF (Storing additional information) You can


For every data set, you can store additional information save the current settings together with the edited
which will support you in the easy management of the additional information at a new and still empty
data sets. You have 9 fields at your disposal for this dataset number (analogously to function STORE in
purpose. the function group MEM),
You can enter a maximum of 24 alphanumeric charac- subsequently enter and save additional information
ters in the following fields: for an already stored data set,
DATNAME Dataset name overwrite the already saved additional information of
a data set.
OBJECT Object description
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select and acitvate
FLAWIND Flaw indication the function TESTINF. The table will now show the
OPERAT Name of the person carrying out the test additional information saved for the currently select-
ed data set.
SURFACE Surface quality
Use (INFO 3) and to select the field SET-#.
COMMENT Comments
Use the right-hand rotary knob to view the additional
You can enter numerical values in these fields: information for other data sets and to edit this
information if required.
FLAWLEN Flaw length

X-POS x-position coordinate

Y-POS y-position coordinate

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-39

Dataset management (function group DATA) Operation

TESTINF (Storing additional information) You can


For every data set, you can store additional information save the current settings together with the edited
which will support you in the easy management of the additional information at a new and still empty
data sets. You have 9 fields at your disposal for this dataset number (analogously to function STORE in
purpose. the function group MEM),
You can enter a maximum of 24 alphanumeric charac- subsequently enter and save additional information
ters in the following fields: for an already stored data set,
DATNAME Dataset name overwrite the already saved additional information of
a data set.
OBJECT Object description
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select and acitvate
FLAWIND Flaw indication the function TESTINF. The table will now show the
OPERAT Name of the person carrying out the test additional information saved for the currently select-
ed data set.
SURFACE Surface quality
Use (INFO 3) and to select the field SET-#.
COMMENT Comments
Use the right-hand rotary knob to view the additional
You can enter numerical values in these fields: information for other data sets and to edit this
information if required.
FLAWLEN Flaw length

X-POS x-position coordinate

Y-POS y-position coordinate

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-39


Operation Dataset management (function group DATA)

H Note: Editing additional information


All stored data are displayed for data sets which are You can edit all items with additional information.
already occupied. An occupied data set is marked with
an asterisk (*) before the data set number. If you have A Attention:
selected an empty data set, the field data of the previ-
ously displayed data set are automatically transferred. As long as the field data edited in this table have not
However, the data in the numerical fields FLAWLEN, been saved, the previous entries remain valid. Please
X-POS and Y-POS are deleted. This means that you keep this in mind, e.g. before selecting a new dataset
only have to edit the variable fields in test applications number: all changes in the current data set are lost!
which include continuous saving of results. All alpha-
numerical field data are automatically transferred but Select the required field.
can also be edited if necessary. Use the left-hand rotary knob to mark the required
character position.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the charac-


ter for this position. You only need the right-hand
rotary knob to enter the numerical values in
FLAWLEN, X-POS and Y-POS.

H Note:
You cannot edit the field SET-#. The number of the cur-
rent data set is displayed here.

5-40 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Dataset management (function group DATA)

H Note: Editing additional information


All stored data are displayed for data sets which are You can edit all items with additional information.
already occupied. An occupied data set is marked with
an asterisk (*) before the data set number. If you have A Attention:
selected an empty data set, the field data of the previ-
ously displayed data set are automatically transferred. As long as the field data edited in this table have not
However, the data in the numerical fields FLAWLEN, been saved, the previous entries remain valid. Please
X-POS and Y-POS are deleted. This means that you keep this in mind, e.g. before selecting a new dataset
only have to edit the variable fields in test applications number: all changes in the current data set are lost!
which include continuous saving of results. All alpha-
numerical field data are automatically transferred but Select the required field.
can also be edited if necessary. Use the left-hand rotary knob to mark the required
character position.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the charac-


ter for this position. You only need the right-hand
rotary knob to enter the numerical values in
FLAWLEN, X-POS and Y-POS.

H Note:
You cannot edit the field SET-#. The number of the cur-
rent data set is displayed here.

5-40 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Dataset management (function group DATA) Operation

Storing additional information PREVIEW (Dataset preview)


This function enables you to view the A-scans of all
A Attention: stored data sets.
If you have edited already existing additional informa-
tion, all previous additional information is overwritten Select the PREVIEW function.
when the data are stored. Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
Select the field STO-INF. on. The A-scan and the name of the first data set are
displayed.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set this function
on. The currently displayed data of the fields are now Viewing other data sets:
stored. The function STO-INF is automatically reset Select the SET-# function.
to off at the end of data storage.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the number
If necessary, press one of the keys , or to of the required data set.
go back to the A-scan without storing the data.
Select the RECALL function.
H Note: Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
In the case of previously empty data sets, all instru- on. The selected data set is displayed.
ment settings and the current A-scan are stored simul-
taneously with the edited field data. Only the edited If necessary, confirm the message using the corre-
field data are stored for the previously occupied data sponding key .
sets. Previously stored instrument settings and If necessary, press one of the keys , or to
A-scans are kept. go back to the currently active A-scan.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-41

Dataset management (function group DATA) Operation

Storing additional information PREVIEW (Dataset preview)


This function enables you to view the A-scans of all
A Attention: stored data sets.
If you have edited already existing additional informa-
tion, all previous additional information is overwritten Select the PREVIEW function.
when the data are stored. Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
Select the field STO-INF. on. The A-scan and the name of the first data set are
displayed.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set this function
on. The currently displayed data of the fields are now Viewing other data sets:
stored. The function STO-INF is automatically reset Select the SET-# function.
to off at the end of data storage.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the number
If necessary, press one of the keys , or to of the required data set.
go back to the A-scan without storing the data.
Select the RECALL function.
H Note: Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
In the case of previously empty data sets, all instru- on. The selected data set is displayed.
ment settings and the current A-scan are stored simul-
taneously with the edited field data. Only the edited If necessary, confirm the message using the corre-
field data are stored for the previously occupied data sponding key .
sets. Previously stored instrument settings and If necessary, press one of the keys , or to
A-scans are kept. go back to the currently active A-scan.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-41


Operation Dataset management (function group DATA)

DIR (Dataset directory) SETTING (Function list)


This function enables you to get an overview of all This function provides you with an overview of all set
stored data sets, including their names and numbers. functions of the current data set.

Select the DIR function. Select the SETTING function.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
on. on. The list of the currently set functions is displayed.

The directory list of the stored data sets is displayed Turn the right-hand rotary knob to have other lines
(dataset numbers and names). The display shows displayed. The list is advanced by one line each.
12 data sets at a time. Occupied data sets are
marked with an asterisk (*). If necessary, press one of the keys , or to
go back to the currently active A-scan.
Turn the right-hand rotary knob to have other data
sets displayed. The list always advances by one line
each.

If necessary, press one of the keys , or to


go back to the currently active A-scan.

5-42 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Dataset management (function group DATA)

DIR (Dataset directory) SETTING (Function list)


This function enables you to get an overview of all This function provides you with an overview of all set
stored data sets, including their names and numbers. functions of the current data set.

Select the DIR function. Select the SETTING function.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
on. on. The list of the currently set functions is displayed.

The directory list of the stored data sets is displayed Turn the right-hand rotary knob to have other lines
(dataset numbers and names). The display shows displayed. The list is advanced by one line each.
12 data sets at a time. Occupied data sets are
marked with an asterisk (*). If necessary, press one of the keys , or to
go back to the currently active A-scan.
Turn the right-hand rotary knob to have other data
sets displayed. The list always advances by one line
each.

If necessary, press one of the keys , or to


go back to the currently active A-scan.

5-42 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Configuring the USM 35X for a test application Operation

5.14 Configuring the USM 35X for If required, go to the third operating level.
a test application Select the function group MEAS.

Besides the default settings for the instrument opera-


tion, you have to configure the USM 35X for calibration
and test tasks. You will find the corresponding functions
in the function groups MEAS, MSEL and LCD.

In addition, you have to check the current time and


date, and set them if required, so that they are correctly
stored together with the test results. Please look up the
function groups CFG1 and CFG2 for more functions for
the general instrument setup (please refer to chapter
5.15 General configuration).

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-43

Configuring the USM 35X for a test application Operation

5.14 Configuring the USM 35X for If required, go to the third operating level.
a test application Select the function group MEAS.

Besides the default settings for the instrument opera-


tion, you have to configure the USM 35X for calibration
and test tasks. You will find the corresponding functions
in the function groups MEAS, MSEL and LCD.

In addition, you have to check the current time and


date, and set them if required, so that they are correctly
stored together with the test results. Please look up the
function groups CFG1 and CFG2 for more functions for
the general instrument setup (please refer to chapter
5.15 General configuration).

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-43


Operation Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

TOF (Selecting the measuring point) When adjusted to flank or jflank the sound path mea-
surement is made at the point of intersection of the
The sound path measurement in the calibration process monitor gate with the rising flank of the highest echo in
or in the subsequent echo evaluation process depends the gate.
on the selected measuring point which can be adjusted
either to flank, to peak or to jflank in the USM 35X.

The point of amplitude measurement is marked by a


small upward triangle on the corresponding gate bar.
The point of distance measurement is marked by a
small downward triangle.

H Note:
While DAC, TCG or JISDAC is active you can change
the TOF mode from peak to flank.

measured soundpath: 19,44 mm


amplitude: 94 %

A Attention:
The highest echo in the gate does not have to be the
echo for which the sound path has been measured. This
may lead to false echo evaluation!

5-44 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

TOF (Selecting the measuring point) When adjusted to flank or jflank the sound path mea-
surement is made at the point of intersection of the
The sound path measurement in the calibration process monitor gate with the rising flank of the highest echo in
or in the subsequent echo evaluation process depends the gate.
on the selected measuring point which can be adjusted
either to flank, to peak or to jflank in the USM 35X.

The point of amplitude measurement is marked by a


small upward triangle on the corresponding gate bar.
The point of distance measurement is marked by a
small downward triangle.

H Note:
While DAC, TCG or JISDAC is active you can change
the TOF mode from peak to flank.

measured soundpath: 19,44 mm


amplitude: 94 %

A Attention:
The highest echo in the gate does not have to be the
echo for which the sound path has been measured. This
may lead to false echo evaluation!

5-44 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Configuring the USM 35X for a test application Operation

In order to identify the points of measurement and to In TOF mode jflank the sound path measurement is
avoid misinterpretation two indicators were introduced made at the point of intersection of the monitor gate
per gate: The first triangle pointing downwards indicates with the rising flank of the first echo in the gate. The
the position of the measured sound path (distance), amplitude is measured at the maximum of the first
whereas the triangle pointing upwards marks the posi- echo in the gate even if there are further signals with
tion of the measured amplitude. higher amplitudes in the gate.

In TOF mode peak the sound path and amplitude mea-


surement is made at the maximum of the highest echo
in the gate.

measured soundpath: 19,44 mm


amplitude: 33 %

measured soundpath: 19,65 mm


amplitude: 95 %

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-45

Configuring the USM 35X for a test application Operation

In order to identify the points of measurement and to In TOF mode jflank the sound path measurement is
avoid misinterpretation two indicators were introduced made at the point of intersection of the monitor gate
per gate: The first triangle pointing downwards indicates with the rising flank of the first echo in the gate. The
the position of the measured sound path (distance), amplitude is measured at the maximum of the first
whereas the triangle pointing upwards marks the posi- echo in the gate even if there are further signals with
tion of the measured amplitude. higher amplitudes in the gate.

In TOF mode peak the sound path and amplitude mea-


surement is made at the maximum of the highest echo
in the gate.

measured soundpath: 19,44 mm


amplitude: 33 %

measured soundpath: 19,65 mm


amplitude: 95 %

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-45


Operation Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

In principle, the peak measurement should be preferred S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading)
because the measured distances do not depend on the
echo height in that case. However, there are application You can have a selected reading zoomed in the A-scan
cases in which the flank measurement is either specified, display. The following readings can be selected for the
or it must be applied for technical reasons, e.g. in many zoomed display (in the second column the indication of
tests using dual-element (TR) probes. the readings in the measurement line):
Sa Sa Sound path for gate A
A Attention: Sb Sb Sound path for gate B
In any case, the adjustment of the measuring point for Sb-a ba Difference of single measurements for
calibration and for the subsequent test use must al- sound path gate B gate A
ways be identical. Otherwise measurement errors may Ha % Ha Echo height gate A in % screen height
occur. Hb % Hb Echo height gate B in % screen height
Select the TOF function. Ha dB ha Echo height gate A in dB
Hb dB hb Echo height gate B in dB
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required R-start Rs Range start
setting.
R-end Re Range end
La La Number of legs in gate A
Lb Lb Number of legs in gate B
Lc Lc Number of legs in gate C
Only for flaw position calculation:
Da Da Depth for gate A

5-46 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

In principle, the peak measurement should be preferred S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading)
because the measured distances do not depend on the
echo height in that case. However, there are application You can have a selected reading zoomed in the A-scan
cases in which the flank measurement is either specified, display. The following readings can be selected for the
or it must be applied for technical reasons, e.g. in many zoomed display (in the second column the indication of
tests using dual-element (TR) probes. the readings in the measurement line):
Sa Sa Sound path for gate A
A Attention: Sb Sb Sound path for gate B
In any case, the adjustment of the measuring point for Sb-a ba Difference of single measurements for
calibration and for the subsequent test use must al- sound path gate B gate A
ways be identical. Otherwise measurement errors may Ha % Ha Echo height gate A in % screen height
occur. Hb % Hb Echo height gate B in % screen height
Select the TOF function. Ha dB ha Echo height gate A in dB
Hb dB hb Echo height gate B in dB
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required R-start Rs Range start
setting.
R-end Re Range end
La La Number of legs in gate A
Lb Lb Number of legs in gate B
Lc Lc Number of legs in gate C
Only for flaw position calculation:
Da Da Depth for gate A

5-46 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Configuring the USM 35X for a test application Operation

Db Db Depth for gate B General:


Pa Pa Projection distance for gate A Alarm Al Choice of gates for alarm triggering:
Pb Pb Projection distance for gate B gate A, B or A+B
Ra Ra Reduced projection distance for gate A
H Note:
Rb Rb Reduced projection distance for gate B
If you use the Data Logger option, values for the C gate
Only for DGS:
as well as a few special values for the Data Logger are
ERS ER Equivalent reflector size added to the existing ones, see chapter Option Data
Gt dB Gt DGS test sensitivity Logger.
GrdB Gr DGS reference gain (= instrument gain Select the function S-DISP.
for the reference echo on 80 % screen
height) Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
value for the zoomed display.
Only for DGS and DAC:
Ha %crv Ca Echo height gate A in % referred to curve H Note:
Hb %crv Cb Echo height gate B in % referred to curve
You can likewise configure all readings to be displayed
DGS-Crv Dc Diameter of the DGS curve below the A-scan at the four corresponding positions.
class cl Flaw class according to JIS Z3060-2002 Please refer to Configuring the measurement line.
DAC dB db dB-value by which the DAC gain has
been changed related to the reference
gain (= instrument gain for the DAC
echo on 80 % screen height)

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-47

Configuring the USM 35X for a test application Operation

Db Db Depth for gate B General:


Pa Pa Projection distance for gate A Alarm Al Choice of gates for alarm triggering:
Pb Pb Projection distance for gate B gate A, B or A+B
Ra Ra Reduced projection distance for gate A
H Note:
Rb Rb Reduced projection distance for gate B
If you use the Data Logger option, values for the C gate
Only for DGS:
as well as a few special values for the Data Logger are
ERS ER Equivalent reflector size added to the existing ones, see chapter Option Data
Gt dB Gt DGS test sensitivity Logger.
GrdB Gr DGS reference gain (= instrument gain Select the function S-DISP.
for the reference echo on 80 % screen
height) Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
value for the zoomed display.
Only for DGS and DAC:
Ha %crv Ca Echo height gate A in % referred to curve H Note:
Hb %crv Cb Echo height gate B in % referred to curve
You can likewise configure all readings to be displayed
DGS-Crv Dc Diameter of the DGS curve below the A-scan at the four corresponding positions.
class cl Flaw class according to JIS Z3060-2002 Please refer to Configuring the measurement line.
DAC dB db dB-value by which the DAC gain has
been changed related to the reference
gain (= instrument gain for the DAC
echo on 80 % screen height)

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-47


Operation Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

MAGNIFY (Gate spreading) H Note:


Read chapter 5.12 to learn how to load a saved data
The setting of the MAGNIFY function causes a spreading set. As a restored data set is displayed with a frozen
of the gate over the entire display width. You can choose A-scan, press the key first.
the gate to be used for the magnify function.
envelop (echo dynamics)
Select the function MAGNIFY. The echo envelope is shown as a dotted line addi-
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to tionally to the A-scan.
aGATE or bGATE if you want to spread the range of peak b (maximum display)
gate A or B over the entire display range. You can use this function to record and document
(as well as to save if required) the peaked, maximum
A-Scan (Setting the A-scan) echo display. With the B gate active, the A-scan with
the highest echo amplitude (recording of maximum
This function offers you several options for setting your display) is shown as a dotted line additionally to the
A-scan. live A-scan when peaking an echo display (in B
stndard gate). This A-scan becomes the statically frozen
Normal A-scan setting. The key effects a static A-scan by pressing the key, and it can then be
freeze. evaluated accordingly.

compare (A-scan comparison)


You can compare a current echo display with a
stored one. The display last stored using either
from the current application or from a stored data set
is displayed in the background as a dotted line.

5-48 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

MAGNIFY (Gate spreading) H Note:


Read chapter 5.12 to learn how to load a saved data
The setting of the MAGNIFY function causes a spreading set. As a restored data set is displayed with a frozen
of the gate over the entire display width. You can choose A-scan, press the key first.
the gate to be used for the magnify function.
envelop (echo dynamics)
Select the function MAGNIFY. The echo envelope is shown as a dotted line addi-
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to tionally to the A-scan.
aGATE or bGATE if you want to spread the range of peak b (maximum display)
gate A or B over the entire display range. You can use this function to record and document
(as well as to save if required) the peaked, maximum
A-Scan (Setting the A-scan) echo display. With the B gate active, the A-scan with
the highest echo amplitude (recording of maximum
This function offers you several options for setting your display) is shown as a dotted line additionally to the
A-scan. live A-scan when peaking an echo display (in B
stndard gate). This A-scan becomes the statically frozen
Normal A-scan setting. The key effects a static A-scan by pressing the key, and it can then be
freeze. evaluated accordingly.

compare (A-scan comparison)


You can compare a current echo display with a
stored one. The display last stored using either
from the current application or from a stored data set
is displayed in the background as a dotted line.

5-48 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Configuring the USM 35X for a test application Operation

afreeze/bfreeze (automatic freeze) Configuring the measurement line


Whenever you select this function, an echo display
connected with the A or B gate will automatically The configuration of your measurement line is carried
switch over to A-scan freeze (automatic freeze). This out in the function group MSEL, this means that you
setting is especially well suited e.g. for high-tempera- can choose the reading for one of the four possible
ture measurements, for measurements involving positions of the measurement line for direct measured-
difficult coupling conditions, or for spot weld testing. value display during the test.

If required, go to the third operating level.


H Note:
Select the function group MSEL.
If you are using a Data Logger option, you also have
the function cfreeze (for C gate) at your disposal.

Select the function A-SCAN.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required


setting.

Pay attention to the additional information referring to


the corresponding setting options (see preceeding
page).

Functions of the function group MSEL:

MEAS-P1 MEAS-P2 MEAS-P3 MEAS-P4


Measured values at positions 1 to 4

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-49

Configuring the USM 35X for a test application Operation

afreeze/bfreeze (automatic freeze) Configuring the measurement line


Whenever you select this function, an echo display
connected with the A or B gate will automatically The configuration of your measurement line is carried
switch over to A-scan freeze (automatic freeze). This out in the function group MSEL, this means that you
setting is especially well suited e.g. for high-tempera- can choose the reading for one of the four possible
ture measurements, for measurements involving positions of the measurement line for direct measured-
difficult coupling conditions, or for spot weld testing. value display during the test.

If required, go to the third operating level.


H Note:
Select the function group MSEL.
If you are using a Data Logger option, you also have
the function cfreeze (for C gate) at your disposal.

Select the function A-SCAN.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required


setting.

Pay attention to the additional information referring to


the corresponding setting options (see preceeding
page).

Functions of the function group MSEL:

MEAS-P1 MEAS-P2 MEAS-P3 MEAS-P4


Measured values at positions 1 to 4

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-49


Operation Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

All measured values which have also been described Setting the display
for the zoomed display of the function S-DISP are
availabe to you at each position. In the function group LCD, you will find setting options
for the display screen itself and for the echo display.

H Note: If required, go to the third operating level.


As an alternative, you can display a scale in the mea- Select the function group LCD.
surement line (ref. function SCALE).

Select the function MEAS-P1 to MEAS-P4.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required


measured value for each position in the correspond-
ing function.

H Note:
Double assignment of the function FILLED/VGA. Toggle
between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the
corresponding key .

5-50 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

All measured values which have also been described Setting the display
for the zoomed display of the function S-DISP are
availabe to you at each position. In the function group LCD, you will find setting options
for the display screen itself and for the echo display.

H Note: If required, go to the third operating level.


As an alternative, you can display a scale in the mea- Select the function group LCD.
surement line (ref. function SCALE).

Select the function MEAS-P1 to MEAS-P4.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required


measured value for each position in the correspond-
ing function.

H Note:
Double assignment of the function FILLED/VGA. Toggle
between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the
corresponding key .

5-50 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Configuring the USM 35X for a test application Operation

FILLED (Echo display mode) VGA


The function FILLED toggles between the filled and the You can switch the VGA output on and off.
normal echo display mode. The filled echo display mode
improves the echo perceptibility due to the strong con-
H Note:
trast, especially in cases where workpieces are scanned
more quickly. You should only switch the VGA output on if you aim to
transfer the display contents to an external instrument.
If the VGA output is switched off, the current consump-
H Note:
tion is reduced and the operating time is extended in
If the function COLOR is active, the filled area is also battery operation.
displayed in different colors.
Select the function VGA.
Select the function FILLED.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on or off.
on or off.
SCHEME
You have a choice between four color schemes. The
color scheme determines the color of all displays and
that of the background. You cannot vary the colors of
gates because they are fixed as follows:
Gate A red
Gate B green
Gate C blue
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-51

Configuring the USM 35X for a test application Operation

FILLED (Echo display mode) VGA


The function FILLED toggles between the filled and the You can switch the VGA output on and off.
normal echo display mode. The filled echo display mode
improves the echo perceptibility due to the strong con-
H Note:
trast, especially in cases where workpieces are scanned
more quickly. You should only switch the VGA output on if you aim to
transfer the display contents to an external instrument.
If the VGA output is switched off, the current consump-
H Note:
tion is reduced and the operating time is extended in
If the function COLOR is active, the filled area is also battery operation.
displayed in different colors.
Select the function VGA.
Select the function FILLED.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to on or off.
on or off.
SCHEME
You have a choice between four color schemes. The
color scheme determines the color of all displays and
that of the background. You cannot vary the colors of
gates because they are fixed as follows:
Gate A red
Gate B green
Gate C blue
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-51
Operation Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

H Note: SCALE (Configuring the measurement line)


All color schemes are suitable for indoor use. For out- As an alternative to the measured values, the USM 35X
door use, we recommend the color schemes 3 and 4. enables to display a scale in the measurement line. The
scale gives you an overview of the position of echoes.
Select the function SCHEME.
You have a choice between a dimensionless ten-divi-
Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required sion scale and a scale showing the real position of the
color scheme. echoes.

The following settings are possible:


LIGHT (LCD backlight)
measval Display of measured values
You can choose between a lighting in the economy
mode min. and a brighter lighting max. for the display snd-pth Display of sound path scale
lighting. The economy mode is the default setting.
div. Display of a dimensionless scale

H Note: Select the function SCALE.


The economy mode reduces the current consumption Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required
and consequently increases the operating time in bat- display mode.
tery operation.

Select the function LIGHT.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required


lighting.

5-52 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Configuring the USM 35X for a test application

H Note: SCALE (Configuring the measurement line)


All color schemes are suitable for indoor use. For out- As an alternative to the measured values, the USM 35X
door use, we recommend the color schemes 3 and 4. enables to display a scale in the measurement line. The
scale gives you an overview of the position of echoes.
Select the function SCHEME.
You have a choice between a dimensionless ten-divi-
Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required sion scale and a scale showing the real position of the
color scheme. echoes.

The following settings are possible:


LIGHT (LCD backlight)
measval Display of measured values
You can choose between a lighting in the economy
mode min. and a brighter lighting max. for the display snd-pth Display of sound path scale
lighting. The economy mode is the default setting.
div. Display of a dimensionless scale

H Note: Select the function SCALE.


The economy mode reduces the current consumption Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required
and consequently increases the operating time in bat- display mode.
tery operation.

Select the function LIGHT.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required


lighting.

5-52 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


General configuration Operation

5.15 General configuration Functions of


CFG1 CFG2:
Dialog language Date
More functions for the basic configuration of the USM 35X
Unit Time
may be found in the function groups CFG1 and CFG2.
Baud rate Analog output
If required, go to the third operating level. Printer selection Horn
Assignment of the key Evaluation mode
Select the function group CFG1 or CFG2.

H Note:
Double assignment of the functions DIALOG/UNIT and
DATE/TIME. Toggle between the two functions by re-
peatedly pressing the corresponding key .

DIALOG (Selecting the language)


In this function you can select the language for dis-
playing the function names on the screen and for the
test report.

The following languages are available:


German
English (default setting)
French
Italian
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-53

General configuration Operation

5.15 General configuration Functions of


CFG1 CFG2:
Dialog language Date
More functions for the basic configuration of the USM 35X
Unit Time
may be found in the function groups CFG1 and CFG2.
Baud rate Analog output
If required, go to the third operating level. Printer selection Horn
Assignment of the key Evaluation mode
Select the function group CFG1 or CFG2.

H Note:
Double assignment of the functions DIALOG/UNIT and
DATE/TIME. Toggle between the two functions by re-
peatedly pressing the corresponding key .

DIALOG (Selecting the language)


In this function you can select the language for dis-
playing the function names on the screen and for the
test report.

The following languages are available:


German
English (default setting)
French
Italian
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-53
Operation General configuration

Spanish UNIT (Selecting units of measurement)


Portuguese
You can choose the required units between mm or inch
Dutch in the function UNIT.
Swedish
Slovenian
Romanian
A Attention:
Finnish You should always make your decision on the units
Czech immediately when starting to work with the USM 35X. If
Danish you change the unit, all current settings are deleted,
and the basic setup is loaded.
Hungarian
Croatian Select the function UNIT.
Russian
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
Slovakian
unit.
Norwegian
Polish To avoid any accidental deleting of values, the
Japanese measurement line will display a safety prompt:
Change unit?
H Note:
If you are sure that you want to change the unit of
More dialog languages can be added on request. measurement, press the corresponding key of the
function UNIT. Any other key would abort the process.
Select the function DIALOG.
The unit of measurement is now changed; the current
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required data are deleted.
language.
5-54 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation General configuration

Spanish UNIT (Selecting units of measurement)


Portuguese
You can choose the required units between mm or inch
Dutch in the function UNIT.
Swedish
Slovenian
Romanian
A Attention:
Finnish You should always make your decision on the units
Czech immediately when starting to work with the USM 35X. If
Danish you change the unit, all current settings are deleted,
and the basic setup is loaded.
Hungarian
Croatian Select the function UNIT.
Russian
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
Slovakian
unit.
Norwegian
Polish To avoid any accidental deleting of values, the
Japanese measurement line will display a safety prompt:
Change unit?
H Note:
If you are sure that you want to change the unit of
More dialog languages can be added on request. measurement, press the corresponding key of the
function UNIT. Any other key would abort the process.
Select the function DIALOG.
The unit of measurement is now changed; the current
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required data are deleted.
language.
5-54 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X
General configuration Operation

BAUD-R (Baud rate for transmission) H Note:


In this function you can select the baud rate for the For more details on the how to print out a test report,
serial port transmission. You have a choice between please refer to chapter 6 Documentation.
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, and
Select the function PRINTER.
57600 Baud.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
Select the function BAUD-R.
printer.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
baud rate.
COPYMOD (Assignment of the key)
PRINTER (Printer for test report) When the key is pressed, data are output to the
RS232 interface and transferred to a printer or a PC.
In this function you can select the connected printer for
printing out your test report. You can use the function COPYMOD to choose the
data to be transferred when the key is pressed. You
You have a choice between the following printer types: have the following setting options:
Epson hardcpy
Hardcopy of the screen contents
HP LaserJet
report
HP DeskJet Test report with A-scan, all relevant settings for the
Seiko DPU inspection and space for hand-written remarks
meas P5
HP LaserJet 1200 series The magnified value given at the right upper corner
HP DeskJet 1200 series of the A-scan
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-55

General configuration Operation

BAUD-R (Baud rate for transmission) H Note:


In this function you can select the baud rate for the For more details on the how to print out a test report,
serial port transmission. You have a choice between please refer to chapter 6 Documentation.
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, and
Select the function PRINTER.
57600 Baud.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
Select the function BAUD-R.
printer.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
baud rate.
COPYMOD (Assignment of the key)
PRINTER (Printer for test report) When the key is pressed, data are output to the
RS232 interface and transferred to a printer or a PC.
In this function you can select the connected printer for
printing out your test report. You can use the function COPYMOD to choose the
data to be transferred when the key is pressed. You
You have a choice between the following printer types: have the following setting options:
Epson hardcpy
Hardcopy of the screen contents
HP LaserJet
report
HP DeskJet Test report with A-scan, all relevant settings for the
Seiko DPU inspection and space for hand-written remarks
meas P5
HP LaserJet 1200 series The magnified value given at the right upper corner
HP DeskJet 1200 series of the A-scan
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-55
Operation General configuration

meas P1 H Note:
The measured value given at position 1 in the
Please also refer to chapter 6 Documentation.
measurement line
pardump Select the function COPYMOD.
All instrument functions with the current settings
PCX Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required
Screen contents as a PCX-format file. To transfer the assignment for the key.
data to the PC, you will need a terminal program.
store TIME/DATE (Setting the time and date)
The current instrument setting is stored to the
selected (free) data set, and the data set number You have to check the current date and time and, if
(DAT-#) is automatically increased. required, set them so that these data are correctly
saved together with the test results.
datalog (only with Data Logger option)
The selected job is printed out as a report including
all measured values.
off
The key is deactivated.
special
as setting hardcpy. After printout of the screen
contents no form feed, every press on the key prints
out the next hardcopy on the same page (three or
four hardcopies depending on the printer).

5-56 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation General configuration

meas P1 H Note:
The measured value given at position 1 in the
Please also refer to chapter 6 Documentation.
measurement line
pardump Select the function COPYMOD.
All instrument functions with the current settings
PCX Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the required
Screen contents as a PCX-format file. To transfer the assignment for the key.
data to the PC, you will need a terminal program.
store TIME/DATE (Setting the time and date)
The current instrument setting is stored to the
selected (free) data set, and the data set number You have to check the current date and time and, if
(DAT-#) is automatically increased. required, set them so that these data are correctly
saved together with the test results.
datalog (only with Data Logger option)
The selected job is printed out as a report including
all measured values.
off
The key is deactivated.
special
as setting hardcpy. After printout of the screen
contents no form feed, every press on the key prints
out the next hardcopy on the same page (three or
four hardcopies depending on the printer).

5-56 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


General configuration Operation

H Note: ANAMOD
Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >). You can output results of measurements at the analog
Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press- output for external further processing. Use the function
ing the corresponding key . ANAMOD to configure the analog output in case there
is no echo in the evaluation gate and the analog voltage
A Attention: has been selected for the sound path at the output.

Always make sure that you are using correctly set You have the following setting options:
time and date values. Otherwise test results might be
corrupted. Be aware that the USM 35X displays the lo volt
year as a two digit number! The analog output supplies 0 volt.

Select the function TIME. hi volt


The analog output supplies 5 volts.
Use the left-hand rotary knob to highlight the value
that you want to change, e.g. the hour. Select the function ANAMOD.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to change the high- Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required
lighted value. value.

Select the function DATE.

Use the left-hand rotary knob to highlight the value


that you want to change, e.g. the day.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to change the high-


lighted value.
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-57

General configuration Operation

H Note: ANAMOD
Double assignment of the function DATE/TIME (icon >). You can output results of measurements at the analog
Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press- output for external further processing. Use the function
ing the corresponding key . ANAMOD to configure the analog output in case there
is no echo in the evaluation gate and the analog voltage
A Attention: has been selected for the sound path at the output.

Always make sure that you are using correctly set You have the following setting options:
time and date values. Otherwise test results might be
corrupted. Be aware that the USM 35X displays the lo volt
year as a two digit number! The analog output supplies 0 volt.

Select the function TIME. hi volt


The analog output supplies 5 volts.
Use the left-hand rotary knob to highlight the value
that you want to change, e.g. the hour. Select the function ANAMOD.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to change the high- Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required
lighted value. value.

Select the function DATE.

Use the left-hand rotary knob to highlight the value


that you want to change, e.g. the day.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to change the high-


lighted value.
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-57
Operation General configuration

HORN EVAMOD (Echo evaluation)


In this function, you can decide whether or not an This is where you can choose a method for the evalua-
acoustic alarm should be given in addition to the visual tion of the measured reflector echo. Depending on the
alarm (LED A). instrument version used, you have various methods to
choose from.
Select the function HORN.
REF (default setting)
Use the left-hand rotary knob to set the horn to on or Evaluation using the measurement of dB difference,
off. available for all instrument versions

AWS
H Note:
Rating of welds according to AWS
Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circum-
stances. These are caused by intermediate conditions DAC (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S)
in instrument operation occuring when the instrument is Evaluation using the Distance-Amplitude Curve
used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Pos-
JISDAC (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S)
sible alarms occuring during instrument operation
Evaluation using the Distance-Amplitude Curve
(setting of functions) are to be ignored.
according to JIS Z3060-2002

DGS (only USM 35X S)


Evaluation using the DGS method

Select the function EVAMOD.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required


method.
5-58 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation General configuration

HORN EVAMOD (Echo evaluation)


In this function, you can decide whether or not an This is where you can choose a method for the evalua-
acoustic alarm should be given in addition to the visual tion of the measured reflector echo. Depending on the
alarm (LED A). instrument version used, you have various methods to
choose from.
Select the function HORN.
REF (default setting)
Use the left-hand rotary knob to set the horn to on or Evaluation using the measurement of dB difference,
off. available for all instrument versions

AWS
H Note:
Rating of welds according to AWS
Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circum-
stances. These are caused by intermediate conditions DAC (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S)
in instrument operation occuring when the instrument is Evaluation using the Distance-Amplitude Curve
used, i.e. when function parameters are changed. Pos-
JISDAC (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S)
sible alarms occuring during instrument operation
Evaluation using the Distance-Amplitude Curve
(setting of functions) are to be ignored.
according to JIS Z3060-2002

DGS (only USM 35X S)


Evaluation using the DGS method

Select the function EVAMOD.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to choose the required


method.
5-58 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X
Other functions with special keys Operation

5.16 Other functions with Zooming the echo display


special keys If you press the key , the echo display is zoomed (zoom
function) and is superimposed on the function group.
H Note:
The functions are not accessible in this mode, except
You will find a description of the key (setting of the for the gain. It can still be set by means of the left-hand
dB incrementation for gain) on page 5-5; the key, rotary knob.
which you will need for printing out your test report, is
H Note:
described in chapter 6 Documentation.
You cannot switch on the zoom function with gate
widths smaller than 0.5 mm/0.02" (5920 m/s).
Freeze
The key enables you to store (freeze) the displayed Press the button in order to change to the zoom
image on the screen. Gate parameters may still be mode.
changed in order to evaluate any signal being displayed Press the button one more time in order to return
in the frozen screen. The measurement resolution is to the normal mode.
only 0.5 % of the displayed range.

Press if you want to store (freeze) a current The key


display.
You can use this key to save measured values and A-
Press again in order to return to normal mode. scans. In addition, it serves for recording echoes, for
example as a reference echo.

Press the key in order to save a measured value


or to record an echo.
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-59

Other functions with special keys Operation

5.16 Other functions with Zooming the echo display


special keys If you press the key , the echo display is zoomed (zoom
function) and is superimposed on the function group.
H Note:
The functions are not accessible in this mode, except
You will find a description of the key (setting of the for the gain. It can still be set by means of the left-hand
dB incrementation for gain) on page 5-5; the key, rotary knob.
which you will need for printing out your test report, is
H Note:
described in chapter 6 Documentation.
You cannot switch on the zoom function with gate
widths smaller than 0.5 mm/0.02" (5920 m/s).
Freeze
The key enables you to store (freeze) the displayed Press the button in order to change to the zoom
image on the screen. Gate parameters may still be mode.
changed in order to evaluate any signal being displayed Press the button one more time in order to return
in the frozen screen. The measurement resolution is to the normal mode.
only 0.5 % of the displayed range.

Press if you want to store (freeze) a current The key


display.
You can use this key to save measured values and A-
Press again in order to return to normal mode. scans. In addition, it serves for recording echoes, for
example as a reference echo.

Press the key in order to save a measured value


or to record an echo.
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-59
Operation Staus symbols and LEDs

5.17 Status symbols and LEDs H Note:


If you are using the Data Logger option, youll find more
Status symbols can be displayed in the line below the status symbols, see chapter Option Data Logger.
screen display to inform about certain settings and
conditions of the USM 35X. The LEDs above the dis-
LEDs
play give you further information.
Symbol Description

Status symbols A Gate alarm.


Symbol Description R Function REJECT is active.
* Display memory is enabled (freeze), D Function DUAL (pulser-receiver separation)
display is stored. is active.
! Data transfer active,
(printing or remote control). H Note:
B Battery indicator; appears with low battery Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circumstanc-
charge, batteries must be charged. es. These are caused by intermediate conditions in instru-
F Function TOF is set to flank. ment operation occuring when the instrumet is used, i.e.
when function parameters are changed. Possible alarms
P Function TOF is set to peak.
occuring during instrument operation (setting of
J Function TOF is set to jflank. functions) are to be ignored.
T Function T-CORR is active.
R Reference echo has been recorded (DGS).
A Function ATT-OBJ/ATT-REF (sound
attenuation) is active.
5-60 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Staus symbols and LEDs

5.17 Status symbols and LEDs H Note:


If you are using the Data Logger option, youll find more
Status symbols can be displayed in the line below the status symbols, see chapter Option Data Logger.
screen display to inform about certain settings and
conditions of the USM 35X. The LEDs above the dis-
LEDs
play give you further information.
Symbol Description

Status symbols A Gate alarm.


Symbol Description R Function REJECT is active.
* Display memory is enabled (freeze), D Function DUAL (pulser-receiver separation)
display is stored. is active.
! Data transfer active,
(printing or remote control). H Note:
B Battery indicator; appears with low battery Error alarms can be triggered unter certain circumstanc-
charge, batteries must be charged. es. These are caused by intermediate conditions in instru-
F Function TOF is set to flank. ment operation occuring when the instrumet is used, i.e.
when function parameters are changed. Possible alarms
P Function TOF is set to peak.
occuring during instrument operation (setting of
J Function TOF is set to jflank. functions) are to be ignored.
T Function T-CORR is active.
R Reference echo has been recorded (DGS).
A Function ATT-OBJ/ATT-REF (sound
attenuation) is active.
5-60 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X
Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

5.18 Distance-amplitude curve You will find the functions for the distance-amplitude
curve in the function group DAC. If required, select the
(only USM 35X DAC and setting DAC in the function group EVAMOD first.
USM 35S)
If required, go to the third operating level.
H Note: Select the function group CFG2.
The DAC function is available as a fixed function in the Switch the function EVA-MOD over to the setting
second operating level on the USM 35X DAC. With the DAC.
USM 35X S, the DAC function can be additionally
switched over to DGS evaluation mode. Go to the second operating level.

Due to the angle of the sound beam spread and to the Select the function group DAC.
sound attenuation in the material the echo height of
reflectors of equal size depends on the distance to the
probe.

A distance-amplitude curve, which is recorded with


defined reference reflectors, graphically displays these
influences.

If you use a reference block having artificial flaws when


recording a DAC you will be able to apply these echo
amplitudes for the evaluation of discontinuities without
any further correction. The reference block should be
made of the same material as the test object.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-61

Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

5.18 Distance-amplitude curve You will find the functions for the distance-amplitude
curve in the function group DAC. If required, select the
(only USM 35X DAC and setting DAC in the function group EVAMOD first.
USM 35S)
If required, go to the third operating level.
H Note: Select the function group CFG2.
The DAC function is available as a fixed function in the Switch the function EVA-MOD over to the setting
second operating level on the USM 35X DAC. With the DAC.
USM 35X S, the DAC function can be additionally
switched over to DGS evaluation mode. Go to the second operating level.

Due to the angle of the sound beam spread and to the Select the function group DAC.
sound attenuation in the material the echo height of
reflectors of equal size depends on the distance to the
probe.

A distance-amplitude curve, which is recorded with


defined reference reflectors, graphically displays these
influences.

If you use a reference block having artificial flaws when


recording a DAC you will be able to apply these echo
amplitudes for the evaluation of discontinuities without
any further correction. The reference block should be
made of the same material as the test object.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-61


Operation Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

H Note: H Note:
Double assignment of the function T-CORR/OFFSET. No reference echoes can be recorded with
Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press- DACMODE = TCG. TCG can only be activated if the
ing the corresponding key . reference echoes recorded are situated within a dynam-
ic range of 40 dB. Otherwise an error message is out-
put. If the TCG setting should be nevertheless be used
DACMOD (Activating DAC/TCG) in this case, then the DAC must be reduced (by delet-
You can use this function to activate the DAC. The fol- ing the last reference points) until TCG can be switched
lowing settings are available: on.

off Select the function DACMOD.


No DAC is active.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the DAC
DAC setting.
The already saved distance-amplitude curve is
displayed on the screen, or a new DAC is recorded. If there is a DAC stored, it will now be active.

TCG Select the TCG setting.


An existing DAC (at least 2 reference points) is The TCG function is activated so that the DAC
displayed as a horizontal TCG line. becomes a horizontal recording threshold. This
means: all reference echoes recorded are brought
(lifted or lowered) to the same echo height.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting


off in order to deactivate the DAC again.

5-62 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

H Note: H Note:
Double assignment of the function T-CORR/OFFSET. No reference echoes can be recorded with
Toggle between the two functions by repeatedly press- DACMODE = TCG. TCG can only be activated if the
ing the corresponding key . reference echoes recorded are situated within a dynam-
ic range of 40 dB. Otherwise an error message is out-
put. If the TCG setting should be nevertheless be used
DACMOD (Activating DAC/TCG) in this case, then the DAC must be reduced (by delet-
You can use this function to activate the DAC. The fol- ing the last reference points) until TCG can be switched
lowing settings are available: on.

off Select the function DACMOD.


No DAC is active.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the DAC
DAC setting.
The already saved distance-amplitude curve is
displayed on the screen, or a new DAC is recorded. If there is a DAC stored, it will now be active.

TCG Select the TCG setting.


An existing DAC (at least 2 reference points) is The TCG function is activated so that the DAC
displayed as a horizontal TCG line. becomes a horizontal recording threshold. This
means: all reference echoes recorded are brought
(lifted or lowered) to the same echo height.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting


off in order to deactivate the DAC again.

5-62 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

DACECHO (Recording reference curve) Press to record the first reference echo. The
instrument gain will automatically change until the
A Attention: DAC echo in gate A reaches 80% screen height
(+/0,3 dB). The function DACECHO is set to 1 to
Before starting to record a reference curve, the instru- indicate that the first reference echo has been
ment must be correctly calibrated (ref. section successfully recorded. Simultaneously the status
5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X). symbol R appears (= reference echo stored).
The moment a new curve is recorded, a possibly al- Peak the next reference echo, and repeat the record-
ready existing curve must be deleted. If necessary, ing process for other curve points. The number in the
make sure that the old curve has been stored in a free function DACECHO is increased by 1 with each
data set before starting to record a new curve! recording.
Select the function DACMOD.
H Note:
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
DAC. The function DACECHO is set to 0 since there If the message Echo is not valid appears, the refer-
is no previously recorded echo. ence point could not be recorded. Check the gate posi-
tion as well as the height of the reference echo and
Couple the probe to the reference block, and peak repeat the recording.
the first reference echo. Use the left-hand rotary knob
to bring the echo to an amplitude between 70 % and As soon as you have recorded at least two curve refer-
100 % screen height. ence points. Your DAC is already active (please see
previous section). You can record a maximum of
Select the function aSTART, and then move the gate 10 curve reference points.
so that the selected echo is the highest of the echo
sequence within the gate range.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-63

Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

DACECHO (Recording reference curve) Press to record the first reference echo. The
instrument gain will automatically change until the
A Attention: DAC echo in gate A reaches 80% screen height
(+/0,3 dB). The function DACECHO is set to 1 to
Before starting to record a reference curve, the instru- indicate that the first reference echo has been
ment must be correctly calibrated (ref. section successfully recorded. Simultaneously the status
5.7 Calibrating the USM 35X). symbol R appears (= reference echo stored).
The moment a new curve is recorded, a possibly al- Peak the next reference echo, and repeat the record-
ready existing curve must be deleted. If necessary, ing process for other curve points. The number in the
make sure that the old curve has been stored in a free function DACECHO is increased by 1 with each
data set before starting to record a new curve! recording.
Select the function DACMOD.
H Note:
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
DAC. The function DACECHO is set to 0 since there If the message Echo is not valid appears, the refer-
is no previously recorded echo. ence point could not be recorded. Check the gate posi-
tion as well as the height of the reference echo and
Couple the probe to the reference block, and peak repeat the recording.
the first reference echo. Use the left-hand rotary knob
to bring the echo to an amplitude between 70 % and As soon as you have recorded at least two curve refer-
100 % screen height. ence points. Your DAC is already active (please see
previous section). You can record a maximum of
Select the function aSTART, and then move the gate 10 curve reference points.
so that the selected echo is the highest of the echo
sequence within the gate range.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-63


Operation Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S)

Deleting reference points or the complete DAC T-CORR (Sensitivity correction)


You can delete the reference point which was recorded This function enables you to compensate for the trans-
last in each case, or the complete DAC. fer losses in the material under test. This correction is
necessary if test object and reference block have differ-
Select the function DACECHO.
ent surface qualities.
Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward (counter-
You have to find out the adjustment value for the com-
clockwise). The message Do you want to delete
pensation of transfer losses by experiments. The gain
the DAC echo? appears in the measurement line.
is varied accordingly in this connection, the curve line
Press the key in order to delete the last echo, or remains the same.
press another key in order to cancel the process of
Select the function T-CORR.
deleting.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
In this way, you can record one or several new refer-
setting.
ence points.

In order to delete the complete DAC, turn the right-


hand rotary knob upward (clockwise). The message
Do you want to delete all DAC echoes? appears
in the measurement line.

Press the key in order to delete all echoes, or


press another key in order to cancel the process of
deleting.

5-64 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S)

Deleting reference points or the complete DAC T-CORR (Sensitivity correction)


You can delete the reference point which was recorded This function enables you to compensate for the trans-
last in each case, or the complete DAC. fer losses in the material under test. This correction is
necessary if test object and reference block have differ-
Select the function DACECHO.
ent surface qualities.
Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward (counter-
You have to find out the adjustment value for the com-
clockwise). The message Do you want to delete
pensation of transfer losses by experiments. The gain
the DAC echo? appears in the measurement line.
is varied accordingly in this connection, the curve line
Press the key in order to delete the last echo, or remains the same.
press another key in order to cancel the process of
Select the function T-CORR.
deleting.
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
In this way, you can record one or several new refer-
setting.
ence points.

In order to delete the complete DAC, turn the right-


hand rotary knob upward (clockwise). The message
Do you want to delete all DAC echoes? appears
in the measurement line.

Press the key in order to delete all echoes, or


press another key in order to cancel the process of
deleting.

5-64 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) Echo evaluation with DAC


You can activate a multiple DAC and at the same time In order to be able to evaluate a flaw indication by
determine the distance from the registration curve. The means of the DAC, certain conditions must be met:
default setting 6.0 dB generates four other curves at
12 dB, 6 dB, +6 dB, and +12 dB from the registration The distance-amplitude curve must already be
curve. The setting 0 generates only the registration recorded.
curve. Any setting different from 0 generates four other
It only applies to the same probe that was used
curves at a set distance from the original curve. For a
when recording the curve. Not even another probe of
better distinction in multiple DACs the registration curve
the same type must be used!
is displayed as a bold line.
The DAC only apply to the material corresponding to
Adjustment range: 0 dB ... 14 dB in steps of 0.5 dB the material of the reference block.
Select the function OFFSET.
All functions affecting the echo amplitude must be
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required set the same way as they were when the curve was
setting. recorded. This applies in particular to the following
functions: POWER, FREQU, RECTIFY, MTLVEL and
REJECT.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-65

Distance-amplitude curve (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) Echo evaluation with DAC


You can activate a multiple DAC and at the same time In order to be able to evaluate a flaw indication by
determine the distance from the registration curve. The means of the DAC, certain conditions must be met:
default setting 6.0 dB generates four other curves at
12 dB, 6 dB, +6 dB, and +12 dB from the registration The distance-amplitude curve must already be
curve. The setting 0 generates only the registration recorded.
curve. Any setting different from 0 generates four other
It only applies to the same probe that was used
curves at a set distance from the original curve. For a
when recording the curve. Not even another probe of
better distinction in multiple DACs the registration curve
the same type must be used!
is displayed as a bold line.
The DAC only apply to the material corresponding to
Adjustment range: 0 dB ... 14 dB in steps of 0.5 dB the material of the reference block.
Select the function OFFSET.
All functions affecting the echo amplitude must be
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required set the same way as they were when the curve was
setting. recorded. This applies in particular to the following
functions: POWER, FREQU, RECTIFY, MTLVEL and
REJECT.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-65


Operation DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

5.19 Distance-amplitude curve Select the function group JDAC.


according to JIS Z3060-2002
(only USM 35X DAC and
USM 35S)
H Note:

The JISDAC function for echo evaluation with the


dictance-amplitude curve and additional classification
according to JIS Z3060-2002 is available in the
USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S.

You will find the functions for the distance-amplitude


curve according to JIS Z3060-2002 in the function
group JDAC. If required, select the setting JDAC in the H Note:
function group EVAMOD first.
Double assignment of the functions DACMOD/BOLDLI
If required, go to the third operating level. and T-CORR/OFFSET. Toggle between the two functions
by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .
Select the function group CFG2.

Switch the function EVAMOD over to the setting


JDAC.

Go to the second operating level.

5-66 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

5.19 Distance-amplitude curve Select the function group JDAC.


according to JIS Z3060-2002
(only USM 35X DAC and
USM 35S)
H Note:

The JISDAC function for echo evaluation with the


dictance-amplitude curve and additional classification
according to JIS Z3060-2002 is available in the
USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S.

You will find the functions for the distance-amplitude


curve according to JIS Z3060-2002 in the function
group JDAC. If required, select the setting JDAC in the H Note:
function group EVAMOD first.
Double assignment of the functions DACMOD/BOLDLI
If required, go to the third operating level. and T-CORR/OFFSET. Toggle between the two functions
by repeatedly pressing the corresponding key .
Select the function group CFG2.

Switch the function EVAMOD over to the setting


JDAC.

Go to the second operating level.

5-66 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

DACMOD (Activating DAC according to JIS) Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the DAC
setting.
You can use this function to activate the DAC. The fol-
lowing settings are available: If there is a DAC stored, it will now be active.
off Select the TCG setting.
No DAC is active.
The TCG function is activated so that the DAC
DAC becomes a horizontal recording threshold. This
DAC according to JIS with 6 curves. The first 4 curves means: all reference echoes recorded are brought
are identified with the letters L, M, H and U dedicated (lifted or lowered) to the same echo height.
to these curves, and therefore move with any gain
change.

In JISDAC also the echo evaluation in classes can be


performed. The flaw class depends on the position of
the echo peak within the first 4 curves:

class I: amplitude < curve L


class II: curve L < amplitude < curve M
class III: curve M < amplitude < curve H (registra-
tion level)
class IV: amplitude > curve H

Select the function DACMOD.


Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting
off in order to deactivate the DAC again.
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-67

DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

DACMOD (Activating DAC according to JIS) Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the DAC
setting.
You can use this function to activate the DAC. The fol-
lowing settings are available: If there is a DAC stored, it will now be active.
off Select the TCG setting.
No DAC is active.
The TCG function is activated so that the DAC
DAC becomes a horizontal recording threshold. This
DAC according to JIS with 6 curves. The first 4 curves means: all reference echoes recorded are brought
are identified with the letters L, M, H and U dedicated (lifted or lowered) to the same echo height.
to these curves, and therefore move with any gain
change.

In JISDAC also the echo evaluation in classes can be


performed. The flaw class depends on the position of
the echo peak within the first 4 curves:

class I: amplitude < curve L


class II: curve L < amplitude < curve M
class III: curve M < amplitude < curve H (registra-
tion level)
class IV: amplitude > curve H

Select the function DACMOD.


Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting
off in order to deactivate the DAC again.
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-67
Operation DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

DACECHO (Recording reference curve) Couple the probe to the reference block, and peak
the first reference echo. Use the left-hand rotary knob
A Attention: to bring the echo to an amplitude between 70 % and
100 % screen height.
Before starting to record a reference curve, the instru-
ment must be correctly calibrated (ref. section 5.7 Select the function aSTART, and then move the gate
Calibrating the USM 35X). so that the selected echo is the highest of the echo
sequence within the gate range.
The moment a new curve is recorded, a possibly al-
ready existing curve must be deleted. If necessary, Press to record the first reference echo. The
make sure that the old curve has been stored in a free instrument gain will automatically change until the
data set before starting to record a new curve! DAC echo in gate A reaches 80% screen height
(+/ 0,3 dB). The function DACECHO is set to 1 to
Select the function DACMOD. indicate that the first reference echo has been
successfully recorded. Simultaneously the status
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
symbol R appears (= reference echo stored).
DAC. The function DACECHO is set to 0 since there
is no previously recorded echo.
H Note:
The dB-value by which the gain has been changed re-
lated to the reference gain can be displayed using the
new parameter DAC dB.

5-68 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

DACECHO (Recording reference curve) Couple the probe to the reference block, and peak
the first reference echo. Use the left-hand rotary knob
A Attention: to bring the echo to an amplitude between 70 % and
100 % screen height.
Before starting to record a reference curve, the instru-
ment must be correctly calibrated (ref. section 5.7 Select the function aSTART, and then move the gate
Calibrating the USM 35X). so that the selected echo is the highest of the echo
sequence within the gate range.
The moment a new curve is recorded, a possibly al-
ready existing curve must be deleted. If necessary, Press to record the first reference echo. The
make sure that the old curve has been stored in a free instrument gain will automatically change until the
data set before starting to record a new curve! DAC echo in gate A reaches 80% screen height
(+/ 0,3 dB). The function DACECHO is set to 1 to
Select the function DACMOD. indicate that the first reference echo has been
successfully recorded. Simultaneously the status
Use the right-hand rotary knob to set the function to
symbol R appears (= reference echo stored).
DAC. The function DACECHO is set to 0 since there
is no previously recorded echo.
H Note:
The dB-value by which the gain has been changed re-
lated to the reference gain can be displayed using the
new parameter DAC dB.

5-68 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

The function DACECHO displays the number 1. Deleting reference points or the complete DAC
You can delete the reference point which was recorded
last in each case, or the complete DAC.

Select the function DACECHO.

Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward (counter-


clockwise). The message Do you want to delete
the DAC echo? appears in the measurement line.

Press the key in order to delete the last echo, or


press another key in order to cancel the process of
deleting.

In order to delete the complete DAC, turn the right-


Peak the next reference echo, and repeat the record- hand rotary knob upward (clockwise). The message
ing process for other curve points. The number in the Do you want to delete all DAC echoes? appears
function DACECHO is increased by 1 with each in the measurement line.
recording.
Press the key in order to delete all echoes, or
press another key in order to cancel the process of
H Note: deleting.
If the message Echo is not valid appears, the refer- In this way, you can record one or several new refer-
ence point could not be recorded. Check the gate posi- ence points.
tion as well as the height of the reference echo and
repeat the recording.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-69

DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

The function DACECHO displays the number 1. Deleting reference points or the complete DAC
You can delete the reference point which was recorded
last in each case, or the complete DAC.

Select the function DACECHO.

Turn the right-hand rotary knob downward (counter-


clockwise). The message Do you want to delete
the DAC echo? appears in the measurement line.

Press the key in order to delete the last echo, or


press another key in order to cancel the process of
deleting.

In order to delete the complete DAC, turn the right-


Peak the next reference echo, and repeat the record- hand rotary knob upward (clockwise). The message
ing process for other curve points. The number in the Do you want to delete all DAC echoes? appears
function DACECHO is increased by 1 with each in the measurement line.
recording.
Press the key in order to delete all echoes, or
press another key in order to cancel the process of
H Note: deleting.
If the message Echo is not valid appears, the refer- In this way, you can record one or several new refer-
ence point could not be recorded. Check the gate posi- ence points.
tion as well as the height of the reference echo and
repeat the recording.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-69


Operation DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve) Select the function T-CORR.


One of the four curves marked with a character (L, M, Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
H, U) can be selected as the registration curve. This setting.
registration curve will then be displayed as a bold line
and an echo amplitude evaluation (dB-to-curve) will be
made for this curve. OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC)
You can activate a multiple DAC and at the same time
Select the function BOLDLI. determine the distance from the registration curve. The
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required default setting 6.0 dB generates four other curves at
setting. 12 dB, 6 dB, +6 dB, and +12 dB from the registration
curve, and additionally two other curves at +18 dB and
+24 dB. The setting 0 generates only the registration
T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) curve and the two fixed curves. Any setting different
This function enables you to compensate for the trans- from 0 generates four other curves at a set distance
fer losses in the material under test. This correction is from the original curve. For a better distinction in multi-
necessary if test object and reference block have differ- ple DACs the registration curve is displayed as a bold
ent surface qualities. line.

You have to find out the adjustment value for the com- Adjustment range: 0 dB ... 14 dB in steps of 0.5 dB
pensation of transfer losses by experiments. The gain Select the function OFFSET.
is varied accordingly in this connection, the curve line
remains the same. Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
setting.

5-70 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S)

BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve) Select the function T-CORR.


One of the four curves marked with a character (L, M, Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
H, U) can be selected as the registration curve. This setting.
registration curve will then be displayed as a bold line
and an echo amplitude evaluation (dB-to-curve) will be
made for this curve. OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC)
You can activate a multiple DAC and at the same time
Select the function BOLDLI. determine the distance from the registration curve. The
Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required default setting 6.0 dB generates four other curves at
setting. 12 dB, 6 dB, +6 dB, and +12 dB from the registration
curve, and additionally two other curves at +18 dB and
+24 dB. The setting 0 generates only the registration
T-CORR (Sensitivity correction) curve and the two fixed curves. Any setting different
This function enables you to compensate for the trans- from 0 generates four other curves at a set distance
fer losses in the material under test. This correction is from the original curve. For a better distinction in multi-
necessary if test object and reference block have differ- ple DACs the registration curve is displayed as a bold
ent surface qualities. line.

You have to find out the adjustment value for the com- Adjustment range: 0 dB ... 14 dB in steps of 0.5 dB
pensation of transfer losses by experiments. The gain Select the function OFFSET.
is varied accordingly in this connection, the curve line
remains the same. Use the right-hand rotary knob to select the required
setting.

5-70 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

Echo evaluation with DAC 5.20 Evaluation according to the


In order to be able to evaluate a flaw indication by DGS method (only USM 35X S)
means of the DAC, certain conditions must be met:
With the USM 35X S, you can use both the DAC and
The distance-amplitude curve must already be
the DGS method of amplitude evaluation.
recorded.

It only applies to the same probe that was used Measuring with DGS
when recording the curve. Not even another probe of
the same type must be used! Using the DGS function (Distance Gain Size), you can
compare the reflecting power of a natural flaw in the
The DAC only apply to the material corresponding to test object with that of a theoretical flaw (circular disk-
the material of the reference block. shaped equivalent reflector) at the same depth.
All functions affecting the echo amplitude must be
set the same way as they were when the curve was A Attention:
recorded. This applies in particular to the following You are comparing the reflecting power of a natural flaw
functions: POWER, FREQU, RECTIFY, MTLVEL and with that of a theoretical flaw. No definite conclusions
REJECT. may be drawn on the natural flaw (roughness, inclined
position, etc.).

The so-called DGS diagram forms the basis for this


comparison of the reflecting power. This diagram con-
sists of a set of curves showing the correlation of three
influencing variables:

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-71

DAC according to JIS Z3060-2002 (only USM 35X DAC and USM 35S) Operation

Echo evaluation with DAC 5.20 Evaluation according to the


In order to be able to evaluate a flaw indication by DGS method (only USM 35X S)
means of the DAC, certain conditions must be met:
With the USM 35X S, you can use both the DAC and
The distance-amplitude curve must already be
the DGS method of amplitude evaluation.
recorded.

It only applies to the same probe that was used Measuring with DGS
when recording the curve. Not even another probe of
the same type must be used! Using the DGS function (Distance Gain Size), you can
compare the reflecting power of a natural flaw in the
The DAC only apply to the material corresponding to test object with that of a theoretical flaw (circular disk-
the material of the reference block. shaped equivalent reflector) at the same depth.
All functions affecting the echo amplitude must be
set the same way as they were when the curve was A Attention:
recorded. This applies in particular to the following You are comparing the reflecting power of a natural flaw
functions: POWER, FREQU, RECTIFY, MTLVEL and with that of a theoretical flaw. No definite conclusions
REJECT. may be drawn on the natural flaw (roughness, inclined
position, etc.).

The so-called DGS diagram forms the basis for this


comparison of the reflecting power. This diagram con-
sists of a set of curves showing the correlation of three
influencing variables:

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-71


Operation Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S)

Distance D between the probe and circular disk- The following probe parameters affect the curve shape:
shaped equivalent reflector
element or crystal diameter
Difference in gain G between various large circular
disk-shaped equivalent reflectors and an infinitely frequency
large backwall delay length
Size S of the circular disk-shaped equivalent reflec-
delay velocity
tor. The influencing variable S always remains
constant for one curve of the set of curves You can adjust these parameters on the USM 35X S in
such a way that you can use the DGS method with
The advantage of the DGS method lies in the fact that
many different probes and on different materials.
you can carry out reproducible evaluations of small
discontinuities. The reproducibility is most of all impor-
tant, for example, whenever you aim to carry out an H Note:
acceptance test. Before setting the DGS function, the instrument must
Apart from the influencing variables already mentioned, first be calibrated because all functions affecting the
there are other factors determining the curve shape: DGS evaluation mode (MTLVEL, P-DELAY, DAMPING,
POWER, FINE G, FREQU, RECTIFY) can no longer be
sound attenuation changed after the reference echo has been recorded.

transfer losses Please also refer to chapter 5.7 Calibrating the


USM 35X on this subject.
amplitude correction value

probe.

5-72 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S)

Distance D between the probe and circular disk- The following probe parameters affect the curve shape:
shaped equivalent reflector
element or crystal diameter
Difference in gain G between various large circular
disk-shaped equivalent reflectors and an infinitely frequency
large backwall delay length
Size S of the circular disk-shaped equivalent reflec-
delay velocity
tor. The influencing variable S always remains
constant for one curve of the set of curves You can adjust these parameters on the USM 35X S in
such a way that you can use the DGS method with
The advantage of the DGS method lies in the fact that
many different probes and on different materials.
you can carry out reproducible evaluations of small
discontinuities. The reproducibility is most of all impor-
tant, for example, whenever you aim to carry out an H Note:
acceptance test. Before setting the DGS function, the instrument must
Apart from the influencing variables already mentioned, first be calibrated because all functions affecting the
there are other factors determining the curve shape: DGS evaluation mode (MTLVEL, P-DELAY, DAMPING,
POWER, FINE G, FREQU, RECTIFY) can no longer be
sound attenuation changed after the reference echo has been recorded.

transfer losses Please also refer to chapter 5.7 Calibrating the


USM 35X on this subject.
amplitude correction value

probe.

5-72 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) Operation

Selecting the DGS mode Double assignment of functions:


If required, go to the third operating level. The following functions are double assigned. Toggle
between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the
Select the function group CFG2. corresponding key .
Switch the function EVA-MOD over to the setting
DGS.
DGSMEN> DGSMEN>
Go to the second operating level. Calling the DGS menu Switching on/off the
DGS evaluation mode
Select the function group DGS.
T-CORR> OFFSET>
Setting the transfer Activating the multi-curve
correction display mode

Default settings for the DGS measurement


In the next step, the DGS menu is called enabling to
select the corresponding probe and to set the other
DGS parameters:

Select the function DGSMEN.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to call the DGS menu.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-73

Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) Operation

Selecting the DGS mode Double assignment of functions:


If required, go to the third operating level. The following functions are double assigned. Toggle
between the two functions by repeatedly pressing the
Select the function group CFG2. corresponding key .
Switch the function EVA-MOD over to the setting
DGS.
DGSMEN> DGSMEN>
Go to the second operating level. Calling the DGS menu Switching on/off the
DGS evaluation mode
Select the function group DGS.
T-CORR> OFFSET>
Setting the transfer Activating the multi-curve
correction display mode

Default settings for the DGS measurement


In the next step, the DGS menu is called enabling to
select the corresponding probe and to set the other
DGS parameters:

Select the function DGSMEN.

Use the right-hand rotary knob to call the DGS menu.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-73


Operation Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S)

Define your settings: PRBFREQ: probe frequency


Frequency of the transducer; predefined with pro-
PROBE-#: probe number grammed probes.
Fixed-programmed probes with all settings (PRB-
NAME, DEL-VEL, D eff and PRBFREQ cannot be REFECHO: type of the reference reflector used
changed in the case of these probes); BW backwall
PROBE-# = 0 is user-programmable with reference SDH side drilled hole
to all parameters. FBH flat bottom hole

PRBNAME: probe name REFSIZE: size of the reference reflector


The name belongs to the selected probe number and
cannot be changed; the individual probe name can be ATT-REF: sound attenuation in the reference block
entered only with PROBE-# = 0.
ATT-OBJ: sound attenuation in the test object
DGS-CRV: registration curve for DGS evaluation
AMPLCOR: value for the amplitude correction.
This enables you to select the circular disk-shaped
This is required whenever you are using an angle
equivalent reflector diameter to be used for displaying
probe and the quadrant echo from the calibration
the DGS curve and used as recording threshold for
standards K1 or K2 as a reference reflector.
echo evaluations.
To return to the A-scan, press one of the following
DEL-VEL: delay material velocity of the probe keys: , or .
Predefined with programmed probes.

D eff: effective element diameter of the probe used


Predefined with programmed probes.

5-74 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S)

Define your settings: PRBFREQ: probe frequency


Frequency of the transducer; predefined with pro-
PROBE-#: probe number grammed probes.
Fixed-programmed probes with all settings (PRB-
NAME, DEL-VEL, D eff and PRBFREQ cannot be REFECHO: type of the reference reflector used
changed in the case of these probes); BW backwall
PROBE-# = 0 is user-programmable with reference SDH side drilled hole
to all parameters. FBH flat bottom hole

PRBNAME: probe name REFSIZE: size of the reference reflector


The name belongs to the selected probe number and
cannot be changed; the individual probe name can be ATT-REF: sound attenuation in the reference block
entered only with PROBE-# = 0.
ATT-OBJ: sound attenuation in the test object
DGS-CRV: registration curve for DGS evaluation
AMPLCOR: value for the amplitude correction.
This enables you to select the circular disk-shaped
This is required whenever you are using an angle
equivalent reflector diameter to be used for displaying
probe and the quadrant echo from the calibration
the DGS curve and used as recording threshold for
standards K1 or K2 as a reference reflector.
echo evaluations.
To return to the A-scan, press one of the following
DEL-VEL: delay material velocity of the probe keys: , or .
Predefined with programmed probes.

D eff: effective element diameter of the probe used


Predefined with programmed probes.

5-74 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) Operation

Example Recording the reference echo and


displaying the DGS curve
To be able to display the required DGS curve, you have
to first record the reference echo.

You have to start by optimizing the echo of the


reference reflector, in this case the backwall echo
from the test object.

Continue by positioning the gate on the reference echo.

In this example, the probe MB 4 S is selected. Reference


reflector = backwall, the 3 mm circular disc is to be
displayed as curve. The sound attenuation corrections
ATT-REF and ATT-OBJ and the amplitude correction
AMPLCOR (for angle probes and calibration standard
K1/K2) remain at 0.

Select the function DGS-REF, and use the right-hand


rotary knob to switch the function on. The message:
Do you want to change the DGS reference echo?
appears.
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-75

Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) Operation

Example Recording the reference echo and


displaying the DGS curve
To be able to display the required DGS curve, you have
to first record the reference echo.

You have to start by optimizing the echo of the


reference reflector, in this case the backwall echo
from the test object.

Continue by positioning the gate on the reference echo.

In this example, the probe MB 4 S is selected. Reference


reflector = backwall, the 3 mm circular disc is to be
displayed as curve. The sound attenuation corrections
ATT-REF and ATT-OBJ and the amplitude correction
AMPLCOR (for angle probes and calibration standard
K1/K2) remain at 0.

Select the function DGS-REF, and use the right-hand


rotary knob to switch the function on. The message:
Do you want to change the DGS reference echo?
appears.
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-75
Operation Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S)

If required, confirm by pressing again. Evaluation of reflectors


After the successful recording of the reference echo, a Every echo situated within the gate can be immediately
highlighted R will be displayed in the measurement line. evaluated:

Set the function DGSMOD> to on, to switch on DGS


curve.

The measurement line has been configured in such a


way that the sound path S, the echo height in dB
referred to the DGS curve, the equivalent reflector
Taking the general DGS diagram as a basis, the instru- size (ERS) of the flaw echo and the calibration range
ment calculates the required test sensitivity for display- are displayed.
ing the 3 mm curve with its maximum at 80 % screen
height, and sets this value. The current gain is set to 0 The measured value to be zoomed in the A-scan is
during this. In the case of subsequent gain variations, chosen by means of the function S-DISP in the func-
the curve is automatically adapted. tion group MEAS. ERS was chosen in the above exam-
ple. (Also refer to Configuring the measurement line,
p. 5-49.)
5-76 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S)

If required, confirm by pressing again. Evaluation of reflectors


After the successful recording of the reference echo, a Every echo situated within the gate can be immediately
highlighted R will be displayed in the measurement line. evaluated:

Set the function DGSMOD> to on, to switch on DGS


curve.

The measurement line has been configured in such a


way that the sound path S, the echo height in dB
referred to the DGS curve, the equivalent reflector
Taking the general DGS diagram as a basis, the instru- size (ERS) of the flaw echo and the calibration range
ment calculates the required test sensitivity for display- are displayed.
ing the 3 mm curve with its maximum at 80 % screen
height, and sets this value. The current gain is set to 0 The measured value to be zoomed in the A-scan is
during this. In the case of subsequent gain variations, chosen by means of the function S-DISP in the func-
the curve is automatically adapted. tion group MEAS. ERS was chosen in the above exam-
ple. (Also refer to Configuring the measurement line,
p. 5-49.)
5-76 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X
Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) Operation

S-DISP = Ha%Crv, the evaluation result is now the


value exceeding the curve in %.

S-DISP = Ha%, i.e. echo height evaluation as a per-


centage.
At the same time, the multiple-curve display mode is
also active with a curve distance of OFFSET = 6 dB. S-DISP = Gt is a special case: the value displayed is
the DGS test sensitivity with which the maximum of the
specified curve is at 80 %.

This value serves for the purpose of checking and doc-


umenting.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-77

Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) Operation

S-DISP = Ha%Crv, the evaluation result is now the


value exceeding the curve in %.

S-DISP = Ha%, i.e. echo height evaluation as a per-


centage.
At the same time, the multiple-curve display mode is
also active with a curve distance of OFFSET = 6 dB. S-DISP = Gt is a special case: the value displayed is
the DGS test sensitivity with which the maximum of the
specified curve is at 80 %.

This value serves for the purpose of checking and doc-


umenting.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-77


Operation Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S)

Transfer correction Sound attenuation


The transfer correction is activated by means of the If necessary, the DGS curve can take the components
function T-CORR. The test sensitivity is varied by this effective sound attenuation (ATT-OBJ) into account.
value without recalculating the curve. With the value set here, the curve shape is recalculat-
ed so that the effect of sound attenuation is now taken
into consideration when evaluating reflectors.

This means that the test sensitivity is increased by


6 dB in the example in order to compensate for a possi-
bly existing surface roughness. The echo is conse- The DGS curve now includes the effect of sound at-
quently drawn higher by 6 dB on the left, i.e. evaluated tenuation. An active sound attenuation correction is
with ERS 3.2. Status indicator in the measurement line: indicated in the measurement line by a highlighted A.
a highlighted T.
The sound attenuation in the reference block can only
be set prior to recording the reference echo. Therefore,
an error message is displayed here if an attempt is

5-78 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S)

Transfer correction Sound attenuation


The transfer correction is activated by means of the If necessary, the DGS curve can take the components
function T-CORR. The test sensitivity is varied by this effective sound attenuation (ATT-OBJ) into account.
value without recalculating the curve. With the value set here, the curve shape is recalculat-
ed so that the effect of sound attenuation is now taken
into consideration when evaluating reflectors.

This means that the test sensitivity is increased by


6 dB in the example in order to compensate for a possi-
bly existing surface roughness. The echo is conse- The DGS curve now includes the effect of sound at-
quently drawn higher by 6 dB on the left, i.e. evaluated tenuation. An active sound attenuation correction is
with ERS 3.2. Status indicator in the measurement line: indicated in the measurement line by a highlighted A.
a highlighted T.
The sound attenuation in the reference block can only
be set prior to recording the reference echo. Therefore,
an error message is displayed here if an attempt is

5-78 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) Operation

made to change the value because, in fact, a valid


reference echo already exists.

In addition, a different reference reflector type has been


used in the DGS menu below: instead of a backwall, a
circular disk (flat-bottom hole) having a diameter of
3 mm has been set in this case. In this case, of course,
the reference echo has to be received from a 3 mm
circular disk.

A side-drilled hole can also be used as a further refer-


ence reflector with some limitations. It must have a
diameter corresponding to at least 1.5 times the wave-
length used, and the distance must be 1.5 times the
near-field length. The USM 35X S will check these con-
ditions if you aim to use a side-drilled hole as reference
reflector, and will issue an error message if required.

The table on the next page indicates these minimum


data for the existing probes in steel.
After switching on the DGS curve, the reference echo
must therefore clearly touch the 3 mm curve. Conditions for the use of side-drilled holes as reference
reflectors in steel. For other materials, the values must
be converted accordingly.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-79

Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) Operation

made to change the value because, in fact, a valid


reference echo already exists.

In addition, a different reference reflector type has been


used in the DGS menu below: instead of a backwall, a
circular disk (flat-bottom hole) having a diameter of
3 mm has been set in this case. In this case, of course,
the reference echo has to be received from a 3 mm
circular disk.

A side-drilled hole can also be used as a further refer-


ence reflector with some limitations. It must have a
diameter corresponding to at least 1.5 times the wave-
length used, and the distance must be 1.5 times the
near-field length. The USM 35X S will check these con-
ditions if you aim to use a side-drilled hole as reference
reflector, and will issue an error message if required.

The table on the next page indicates these minimum


data for the existing probes in steel.
After switching on the DGS curve, the reference echo
must therefore clearly touch the 3 mm curve. Conditions for the use of side-drilled holes as reference
reflectors in steel. For other materials, the values must
be converted accordingly.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-79


Operation Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S)

Probe Wavelength Minimum Diameter Near Field Length Minimum Distance


in steel side-drilled hole in steel in steel
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]

B1S 6.0 9.0 23 35

B2S 3.0 4.5 45 68

B4S 1.5 2.3 90 135

MB 2 S 3.0 4.5 8 12

MB 4 S 1.5 2.3 15 23

MB 5 S 1.2 1.8 20 30

MWB ...-2 1.6 2.4 15 23

MWB ...-4 0.8 1.2 30 45

SWB ...-2 1.6 2.4 39 59

SWB ...-5 0.7 1.1 98 147

WB ...-1 3.3 5.0 45 68

WB ...-2 1.6 2.4 90 135

5-80 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Operation Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S)

Probe Wavelength Minimum Diameter Near Field Length Minimum Distance


in steel side-drilled hole in steel in steel
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]

B1S 6.0 9.0 23 35

B2S 3.0 4.5 45 68

B4S 1.5 2.3 90 135

MB 2 S 3.0 4.5 8 12

MB 4 S 1.5 2.3 15 23

MB 5 S 1.2 1.8 20 30

MWB ...-2 1.6 2.4 15 23

MWB ...-4 0.8 1.2 30 45

SWB ...-2 1.6 2.4 39 59

SWB ...-5 0.7 1.1 98 147

WB ...-1 3.3 5.0 45 68

WB ...-2 1.6 2.4 90 135

5-80 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) Operation

Locks, error messages Validity of the DGS method


As long as a valid reference echo is stored, no func- Echo amplitude evaluations according to the DGS
tions can be changed which could cause an incorrect method are only reliable and reproducible in cases
DGS evaluation. If an attempt is made to change such when:
a function, the corresponding error message will appear,
e.g. The reference echo is received from the test object if
possible. If this is not possible, it should be ensured
P-DELAY locked by DGS-REF = on that the reference block is made of the same materi-
al as the test object.
The DGS evaluation must likewise be switched off and
the reference echo deleted in the case of selecting a The evaluation is carried out using the same probe
new probe, e.g. for a new test application. which was also used for recording the reference
echo. Another probe of the same type can be used
after recording a new reference echo.

Echo amplitudes for reflector distances smaller than


half of the probes near-field length are subject to
heavy variation for physical reasons due to interfer-
ence phenomena effecting the area. Thus, evaluation
results may fluctuate more as the usually permissi-
ble 2 dB. An evaluation according to the DGS
method is possible but not recommended for this
cases.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-81

Evaluation according to the DGS method (only USM 35X S) Operation

Locks, error messages Validity of the DGS method


As long as a valid reference echo is stored, no func- Echo amplitude evaluations according to the DGS
tions can be changed which could cause an incorrect method are only reliable and reproducible in cases
DGS evaluation. If an attempt is made to change such when:
a function, the corresponding error message will appear,
e.g. The reference echo is received from the test object if
possible. If this is not possible, it should be ensured
P-DELAY locked by DGS-REF = on that the reference block is made of the same materi-
al as the test object.
The DGS evaluation must likewise be switched off and
the reference echo deleted in the case of selecting a The evaluation is carried out using the same probe
new probe, e.g. for a new test application. which was also used for recording the reference
echo. Another probe of the same type can be used
after recording a new reference echo.

Echo amplitudes for reflector distances smaller than


half of the probes near-field length are subject to
heavy variation for physical reasons due to interfer-
ence phenomena effecting the area. Thus, evaluation
results may fluctuate more as the usually permissi-
ble 2 dB. An evaluation according to the DGS
method is possible but not recommended for this
cases.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 5-81


5-82 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

5-82 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Documentation 6

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 6-1

Documentation 6

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 6-1


Documentation Printing data

6.1 Printing data Preparing the printer


The transfer parameter settings for the serial port are:
Direct printing of the following data via the RS 232
interface is possible using the USM 35X: Baud rate 0 (no transmission), 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200,
test report containing the A-scan and the adjustment 38400, and 57600
data
Word length 8 data bits (fixed)
A-scan
Parity none (fixed)
single reading (position 1 of the measurement line)
Stop bits 2 (fixed)
function list (including all current settings)
In order to ensure a perfect communication, set the
Data Logger (if the version is available) printer to the parameters of the USM 35X.
To do this, you need
Preparing the USM 35X
a printer with serial interface RS 232
You decide on the type of printout by assigning the
a printer cable (please see chapter 2) key.

If necessary, go to the third operating level.

Select the function group CFG1.

Select the function PRINTER, and then use the right-


hand rotary knob to select the correct printer driver.

6-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Documentation Printing data

6.1 Printing data Preparing the printer


The transfer parameter settings for the serial port are:
Direct printing of the following data via the RS 232
interface is possible using the USM 35X: Baud rate 0 (no transmission), 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200,
test report containing the A-scan and the adjustment 38400, and 57600
data
Word length 8 data bits (fixed)
A-scan
Parity none (fixed)
single reading (position 1 of the measurement line)
Stop bits 2 (fixed)
function list (including all current settings)
In order to ensure a perfect communication, set the
Data Logger (if the version is available) printer to the parameters of the USM 35X.
To do this, you need
Preparing the USM 35X
a printer with serial interface RS 232
You decide on the type of printout by assigning the
a printer cable (please see chapter 2) key.

If necessary, go to the third operating level.

Select the function group CFG1.

Select the function PRINTER, and then use the right-


hand rotary knob to select the correct printer driver.

6-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Printing data Documentation

Use to select the function COPYMOD, and then


use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting:
hardcpy, report, meas P5 (enlarged value in A-scan),
meas P1 (measured value at position 1), pardump
(function list), datalog (Data Logger job including
measured values), special (several A-scans on one
page).

H Note:
The setting PCX generates a PCX-format file which you
can transfer to a PC by means of a suitable program
capable of receiving and storing data.

Printing
If you have connected, prepared and activated the
printer, just press the key.

The report is printed out.

If you have selected the setting special, press the


key again for each A-scan that you want to print out.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 6-3

Printing data Documentation

Use to select the function COPYMOD, and then


use the right-hand rotary knob to select the setting:
hardcpy, report, meas P5 (enlarged value in A-scan),
meas P1 (measured value at position 1), pardump
(function list), datalog (Data Logger job including
measured values), special (several A-scans on one
page).

H Note:
The setting PCX generates a PCX-format file which you
can transfer to a PC by means of a suitable program
capable of receiving and storing data.

Printing
If you have connected, prepared and activated the
printer, just press the key.

The report is printed out.

If you have selected the setting special, press the


key again for each A-scan that you want to print out.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 6-3


Documentation Documentation with UltraDOC

6.2 Documentation with UltraDOC


The special application program UltraDOC from GE
Inspection Technologies enables you to remote-control
the USM 35X and to include instrument settings in
ASCII format or screen contents in PCX or IMG format
in your test report.

All data can be further processed using commerical


word processing or DTP programs.

You will receive information about the reliable use of the


program in a detailed operating manual.

6-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Documentation Documentation with UltraDOC

6.2 Documentation with UltraDOC


The special application program UltraDOC from GE
Inspection Technologies enables you to remote-control
the USM 35X and to include instrument settings in
ASCII format or screen contents in PCX or IMG format
in your test report.

All data can be further processed using commerical


word processing or DTP programs.

You will receive information about the reliable use of the


program in a detailed operating manual.

6-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Maintenance and care 7

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-1

Maintenance and care 7

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-1


Maintenance and care Care of the instrument

7.1 Care of the instrument


Clean the instrument and its accessories using a moist
cloth. Only use the following recommended instrument
cleaners:

water,

a mild household cleaner or

alcohol (no methyl alcohol).

A Attention:
Do not use any methyl alcohol, solvents, or dye pen-
etrant cleaners!
The plastic parts can be damaged or embrittled by this.

7-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Maintenance and care Care of the instrument

7.1 Care of the instrument


Clean the instrument and its accessories using a moist
cloth. Only use the following recommended instrument
cleaners:

water,

a mild household cleaner or

alcohol (no methyl alcohol).

A Attention:
Do not use any methyl alcohol, solvents, or dye pen-
etrant cleaners!
The plastic parts can be damaged or embrittled by this.

7-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Care of the batteries Maintenance and care

7.2 Care of the batteries A Attention:


You should only use the batteries recommended by us
and the corresponding battery charger. An improper
Care of the batteries handling of the batteries and of the battery charger may
Capacity and life of batteries mainly depend on the cause explosion hazard.
correct handling. Please therefore observe the tips be-
Charging of partially discharged NiCd batteries
low.
If batteries are only partially discharged (less than
You should charge the batteries in the following cases: 50 % of operating time), the full capacity is not reached
before the initial startup by normal charging.

after a storage time of 3 months or longer Start by fully discharging the batteries. You can use
the discharging function of the charger for this. For
after frequent partial discharge more details, please read the notes on the operation
of the battery charger.
Charging the batteries The batteries are automatically charged after that.
You can charge the lithium-ion battery either directly in
Charging of exhausted NiCd batteries
the instrument or by means of the external battery
charger DR36 (order number 35 297) recommended by If batteries are exhausted, e.g. after a prolonged stor-
us. You always need an external battery charger to age time in empty state, they often reach their full ca-
charge standard C-cells. In this regard, please pay at- pacity only after repeated discharge/charge cycles.
tention to the information on the operation of the battery
charger.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-3

Care of the batteries Maintenance and care

7.2 Care of the batteries A Attention:


You should only use the batteries recommended by us
and the corresponding battery charger. An improper
Care of the batteries handling of the batteries and of the battery charger may
Capacity and life of batteries mainly depend on the cause explosion hazard.
correct handling. Please therefore observe the tips be-
Charging of partially discharged NiCd batteries
low.
If batteries are only partially discharged (less than
You should charge the batteries in the following cases: 50 % of operating time), the full capacity is not reached
before the initial startup by normal charging.

after a storage time of 3 months or longer Start by fully discharging the batteries. You can use
the discharging function of the charger for this. For
after frequent partial discharge more details, please read the notes on the operation
of the battery charger.
Charging the batteries The batteries are automatically charged after that.
You can charge the lithium-ion battery either directly in
Charging of exhausted NiCd batteries
the instrument or by means of the external battery
charger DR36 (order number 35 297) recommended by If batteries are exhausted, e.g. after a prolonged stor-
us. You always need an external battery charger to age time in empty state, they often reach their full ca-
charge standard C-cells. In this regard, please pay at- pacity only after repeated discharge/charge cycles.
tention to the information on the operation of the battery
charger.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-3


Maintenance and care Care of the batteries

The charger identifies defective batteries. In that case, How to handle alkaline batteries
replace the batteries by a new set. Otherwise there is
the danger that individual cells have different capacities Please remove the batteries from the instrument if it
so that you will no longer obtain the normal operating has not been operated for a longer time.
time with the instrument in battery operation.
A Attention:
Leaking batteries may cause severe damages to the
instrument! You should always only use leak-proof
batteries and remove them from the instrument after
turning it off.

H Note:
Used batteries are special waste and have to be
disposed of according to legal requirements!

In the interest of environmental protection, we recom-


mend that you only use rechargeable batteries.

7-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Maintenance and care Care of the batteries

The charger identifies defective batteries. In that case, How to handle alkaline batteries
replace the batteries by a new set. Otherwise there is
the danger that individual cells have different capacities Please remove the batteries from the instrument if it
so that you will no longer obtain the normal operating has not been operated for a longer time.
time with the instrument in battery operation.
A Attention:
Leaking batteries may cause severe damages to the
instrument! You should always only use leak-proof
batteries and remove them from the instrument after
turning it off.

H Note:
Used batteries are special waste and have to be
disposed of according to legal requirements!

In the interest of environmental protection, we recom-


mend that you only use rechargeable batteries.

7-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Maintenance Maintenance and care

7.3 Maintenance
The USM 35X requires basically no maintenance.

A Attention:
Repair work may only be carried out by members of
authorized Service staff of GE Inspection Technologies.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-5

Maintenance Maintenance and care

7.3 Maintenance
The USM 35X requires basically no maintenance.

A Attention:
Repair work may only be carried out by members of
authorized Service staff of GE Inspection Technologies.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-5


Maintenance and care Recycling

7.4 Recycling

General view of the device


In the following you find an instrument overview as well as guidelines and notes for recycling and waste disposal of
the components.







 

7-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Maintenance and care Recycling

7.4 Recycling

General view of the device


In the following you find an instrument overview as well as guidelines and notes for recycling and waste disposal of
the components.







 

7-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Recycling Maintenance and care

No. Recycling/material code Description


1 Lithium-ion battery Battery inside the battery compartment at the bottom of the instrument. In
order to open the compartment the quick acting closures have to be
actuated.
2 LCD - display Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts (0 0.5 mg)
of Mercury (Hg)
3 >PC< / Brass Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in brass thread
insert.
4 Stainless steel Handle complete
5 Aluminium Rotary control button
6 >PC< Holder for handle
7 Stainless steel Ratchet disk
8 >PC< Housing lower part
9 Aluminium Div. mounting brackets

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-7

Recycling Maintenance and care

No. Recycling/material code Description


1 Lithium-ion battery Battery inside the battery compartment at the bottom of the instrument. In
order to open the compartment the quick acting closures have to be
actuated.
2 LCD - display Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts (0 0.5 mg)
of Mercury (Hg)
3 >PC< / Brass Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in brass thread
insert.
4 Stainless steel Handle complete
5 Aluminium Rotary control button
6 >PC< Holder for handle
7 Stainless steel Ratchet disk
8 >PC< Housing lower part
9 Aluminium Div. mounting brackets

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-7


Maintenance and care Recycling

Materials for separate disposal


In the following you find guidelines and notes for removing materials/components, which must be removed and
treated separately.

7-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Maintenance and care Recycling

Materials for separate disposal


In the following you find guidelines and notes for removing materials/components, which must be removed and
treated separately.

7-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Recycling Maintenance and care

No. Recycling/material code Description


1 In order to remove the LCD-Display the upper housing has to be withdrawn
first. After loosing 6 screws on the bottom side and one further in battery-
compartment, the complete upper housing can be taken away.
2 In order to open the compartment at the bottom of the equipment, the quick
acting closures have to be actuated.
3 Lithium-ion battery Inside the battery compartment. Can easily be removed after opening the
battery cover.
4 LCD - display Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts (0 0.5 mg)
of Mercury (Hg).

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-9

Recycling Maintenance and care

No. Recycling/material code Description


1 In order to remove the LCD-Display the upper housing has to be withdrawn
first. After loosing 6 screws on the bottom side and one further in battery-
compartment, the complete upper housing can be taken away.
2 In order to open the compartment at the bottom of the equipment, the quick
acting closures have to be actuated.
3 Lithium-ion battery Inside the battery compartment. Can easily be removed after opening the
battery cover.
4 LCD - display Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts (0 0.5 mg)
of Mercury (Hg).

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-9


Maintenance and care Recycling

Further materials and components


In the following you find notes for dismantling materials/components, which can disturb several recycling pro-
cesses, and materials/components for which benefits can normally be achieved.




 

7-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Maintenance and care Recycling

Further materials and components


In the following you find notes for dismantling materials/components, which can disturb several recycling pro-
cesses, and materials/components for which benefits can normally be achieved.




 

7-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Recycling Maintenance and care

No. Recycling/material code Description


1 >PC< / Brass Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in brass thread
insert.
2 Circuit boards Circuit board in lower housing, under it battery-PCB
3 Aluminium Two rotary control buttons
4 Stainless steel Handle, rubber tube can be removed
5 >PC< Lower housing and battery-cover

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-11

Recycling Maintenance and care

No. Recycling/material code Description


1 >PC< / Brass Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in brass thread
insert.
2 Circuit boards Circuit board in lower housing, under it battery-PCB
3 Aluminium Two rotary control buttons
4 Stainless steel Handle, rubber tube can be removed
5 >PC< Lower housing and battery-cover

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-11


Maintenance and care Recycling

Recycling data of master device


Recycling/material code Weight Description
approx. (kg)
Materials/components, which must be removed and treated separately:
LCD - display 0.22 Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts
(0 0.5 mg) of Mercury (Hg)
Lithium-ion battery 0.49 Located inside the battery compartment
subtotal 0.71

Materials/components, which can disturb certain recycling processes:


>PC< / brass 0.16 Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in
brass thread insert.
Circuit boards 0.33 Under LC display unit
subtotal 0.49

Materials/components, through which benefits can normally be achieved:


Stainless steel 0.18 Handle, ratchet disk,
Aluminium 0.15 Rotary control button, mounting sheets,
>PC< 0.42 Lower housing, holder for handle, battery-cover
Rubber 0.05 O-Rings, rubberbase, rubber tube of handle, keypad sealing
subtotal 0.80
7-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Maintenance and care Recycling

Recycling data of master device


Recycling/material code Weight Description
approx. (kg)
Materials/components, which must be removed and treated separately:
LCD - display 0.22 Fluorescent lamps of the LCD display contain trance amounts
(0 0.5 mg) of Mercury (Hg)
Lithium-ion battery 0.49 Located inside the battery compartment
subtotal 0.71

Materials/components, which can disturb certain recycling processes:


>PC< / brass 0.16 Upper equipment cover Polycarbonat >PC< with pressed in
brass thread insert.
Circuit boards 0.33 Under LC display unit
subtotal 0.49

Materials/components, through which benefits can normally be achieved:


Stainless steel 0.18 Handle, ratchet disk,
Aluminium 0.15 Rotary control button, mounting sheets,
>PC< 0.42 Lower housing, holder for handle, battery-cover
Rubber 0.05 O-Rings, rubberbase, rubber tube of handle, keypad sealing
subtotal 0.80
7-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X
Recycling Maintenance and care

Recycling/material code Weight Description


approx. (kg)
Composite materials*:
Membrane keypad 0.20 Foil/aluminium/glass/spring steel/stainless steel
subtotal 0.20

Total 2.20

Mounting material, cables, 0.16


clamps, screws ...

Total weight (incl. battery) 2.36

Special notes: none

* Materials/components, which cannot be separated into mono materials by destructive mechanical processes

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-13

Recycling Maintenance and care

Recycling/material code Weight Description


approx. (kg)
Composite materials*:
Membrane keypad 0.20 Foil/aluminium/glass/spring steel/stainless steel
subtotal 0.20

Total 2.20

Mounting material, cables, 0.16


clamps, screws ...

Total weight (incl. battery) 2.36

Special notes: none

* Materials/components, which cannot be separated into mono materials by destructive mechanical processes

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 7-13


7-14 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

7-14 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Interfaces and peripherals 8

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-1

Interfaces and peripherals 8

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-1


Interfaces and Peripherals Interfaces

8.1 Interfaces
The USM 35X presents different interfaces for the con-
nection of external units and for the data exchange. All
interfaces are located at the instrument front. The fol-
lowing figure gives an overview of the position of inter-
faces.

8-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Interfaces

8.1 Interfaces
The USM 35X presents different interfaces for the con-
nection of external units and for the data exchange. All
interfaces are located at the instrument front. The fol-
lowing figure gives an overview of the position of inter-
faces.

8-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Interfaces Interfaces and Peripherals

1 BNC or LEMO-1-TRIAX socket for the connection of


the transmitter probe (black ring)

2 BNC or LEMO-1-TRIAX socket for the connection of


the receiver probe (red ring)

3 RS 232
serial interface, 9-way Sub-D socket

4 I/O
analog interface, 8-way LEMO-1-B socket

5 RGB-OUT
VGA interface, 10-way LEMO-1-B socket

6 12V DC
Mains connection socket, 4-way LEMO-0-B socket

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-3

Interfaces Interfaces and Peripherals

1 BNC or LEMO-1-TRIAX socket for the connection of


the transmitter probe (black ring)

2 BNC or LEMO-1-TRIAX socket for the connection of


the receiver probe (red ring)

3 RS 232
serial interface, 9-way Sub-D socket

4 I/O
analog interface, 8-way LEMO-1-B socket

5 RGB-OUT
VGA interface, 10-way LEMO-1-B socket

6 12V DC
Mains connection socket, 4-way LEMO-0-B socket

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-3


Interfaces and Peripherals I/O interface

8.2 I/O interface


The USM 35X has an 8-way I/O interface (LEMO-1-B
socket) for different input and output signals:
SAP output (transmitter trigger pulse)
Alarm output (TTL): switching delay approx. 50 ms,
hold time approx. 500 ms.
TDR input (test data release)
Analog output

H Note:
View of the 8-way LEMO-1-B socket
You are able to externally process the alarm condition
with the alarm output, e.g. for sorting and other control
purposes. Error alarms can be triggered under certain
circumstances. These are caused by intermediate con-
ditions in instrument operation occuring when the in-
strument is used, i.e. when function parameters are
changed. Possible alarms occuring during instru-
ment operation (setting of functions) are to be ig-
nored.

8-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals I/O interface

8.2 I/O interface


The USM 35X has an 8-way I/O interface (LEMO-1-B
socket) for different input and output signals:
SAP output (transmitter trigger pulse)
Alarm output (TTL): switching delay approx. 50 ms,
hold time approx. 500 ms.
TDR input (test data release)
Analog output

H Note:
View of the 8-way LEMO-1-B socket
You are able to externally process the alarm condition
with the alarm output, e.g. for sorting and other control
purposes. Error alarms can be triggered under certain
circumstances. These are caused by intermediate con-
ditions in instrument operation occuring when the in-
strument is used, i.e. when function parameters are
changed. Possible alarms occuring during instru-
ment operation (setting of functions) are to be ig-
nored.

8-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


I/O interface Interfaces and Peripherals

Contact assignment of the LEMO-1-B socket


Contact Description Signal direction Level Colour (UM 25*)

1 SAP output TTL white


2 alarm A output TTL grey
3 alarm B output TTL yellow
4 unassigned pink
5 unassigned black
6 TDR input TTL active high blue
7 Analog output, amplitude or time of flight output 05V green
(selectable via remote-control code, see
chapter 8.4 Remote Control)
8 GND ground brown

*UM 25: analog cable (35 268)

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-5

I/O interface Interfaces and Peripherals

Contact assignment of the LEMO-1-B socket


Contact Description Signal direction Level Colour (UM 25*)

1 SAP output TTL white


2 alarm A output TTL grey
3 alarm B output TTL yellow
4 unassigned pink
5 unassigned black
6 TDR input TTL active high blue
7 Analog output, amplitude or time of flight output 05V green
(selectable via remote-control code, see
chapter 8.4 Remote Control)
8 GND ground brown

*UM 25: analog cable (35 268)

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-5


Interfaces and Peripherals RS 232 interface

8.3 RS 232 interface Contact assignment of the Sub-D socket


Contact Designation Signal direction Level
The USM 35X has a RS 232 interface for remote con-
trol and documentation (report printout). 1 unassigned
2 RXD input RS 232
3 TXD output RS 232
4 DTR output RS 232
5 ground RS 232
6 DSR input RS 232
7 RTS output RS 232
View of the 9-way Sub-D socket 8 CTS input RS 232
9 unassigned

H Note:
Switch off the instrument before connecting a cable to
the RS 232 socket or before withdrawing any plugs.

8-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals RS 232 interface

8.3 RS 232 interface Contact assignment of the Sub-D socket


Contact Designation Signal direction Level
The USM 35X has a RS 232 interface for remote con-
trol and documentation (report printout). 1 unassigned
2 RXD input RS 232
3 TXD output RS 232
4 DTR output RS 232
5 ground RS 232
6 DSR input RS 232
7 RTS output RS 232
View of the 9-way Sub-D socket 8 CTS input RS 232
9 unassigned

H Note:
Switch off the instrument before connecting a cable to
the RS 232 socket or before withdrawing any plugs.

8-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


RGB interface Interfaces and Peripherals

8.4 RGB interface H Note:


Before you are able to use the RGB interface, you
The RGB interface serves for the output of the VGA have to activate the function VGA in the function group
signal. You can use this interface to connect the LCD first.
USM 35X with a monitor or with a VGA projector
(beamer). The current display contents are then trans-
ferred to the external unit and can be further used
accordingly.

H Note:
For technical reasons it is unfortunately not possible to
maintain a stable synchronisation of both displays if
the VGA output is active. The external signal for the
connected monitor or beamer is entirely synchronised.
A flickering of the internal display has to be accepted
though. The internal display will be synchronous as
soon as the VGA output has been deactivated.

The interface is a 10-way socket type Lemo-0-B. The


standard contact assignment makes it suitable for all
VGA output units. Use the VGA adapter UM 31 (order
number 35 653) in order to connect a VGA output unit.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-7

RGB interface Interfaces and Peripherals

8.4 RGB interface H Note:


Before you are able to use the RGB interface, you
The RGB interface serves for the output of the VGA have to activate the function VGA in the function group
signal. You can use this interface to connect the LCD first.
USM 35X with a monitor or with a VGA projector
(beamer). The current display contents are then trans-
ferred to the external unit and can be further used
accordingly.

H Note:
For technical reasons it is unfortunately not possible to
maintain a stable synchronisation of both displays if
the VGA output is active. The external signal for the
connected monitor or beamer is entirely synchronised.
A flickering of the internal display has to be accepted
though. The internal display will be synchronous as
soon as the VGA output has been deactivated.

The interface is a 10-way socket type Lemo-0-B. The


standard contact assignment makes it suitable for all
VGA output units. Use the VGA adapter UM 31 (order
number 35 653) in order to connect a VGA output unit.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-7


Interfaces and Peripherals Data exchange

8.5 Data exchange Activation of serial communication


After connecting the instrument to the PC you must
The USM 35X is equipped with the serial interface run a software that opens the serial port. This can ei-
RS 232 for bi-directional data communication with a PC. ther be a commercial terminal program (e.g. Microsoft
When you connect the instrument with a PC you can: Hyper Terminal) or a customised program like
UltraDOC. Make sure that the serial communication
remote control the instrument via the PC, parameters on the PC are identical to those of the
transfer A-scans for documentation, instrument.

transfer instrument settings in ASCII format, The data transmission parameters are as follows:

transfer reports from stored datasets, Baud rate: 0 (no transmission), 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200,
transfers Datalogger jobs in ASCII format (option) 38400, and 57600
Word length: 8 data bits (fixed)
read and write datasets in binary format. Parity: none (fixed)
Stop bits: 2 (fixed)
Connecting a printer or a PC The baud rate can be set in the function BAUD-R in
You can connect the USM 35X to a printer or a PC the menu CFG1 from the third operating level.
using the special Krautkramer cables:
The settings on the USM 35X apply to most of the
PC: UD 20 (25-way) or UD 31 (9-way) printers and PCs. To ensure a perfect communication,
Printer: UD 31 (Seiko DPU) or UD 32 (Epson) please check the settings of the connected peripherals
and adjust them to the parameters of the USM 35X.
Please refer to chapter 2.

8-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Data exchange

8.5 Data exchange Activation of serial communication


After connecting the instrument to the PC you must
The USM 35X is equipped with the serial interface run a software that opens the serial port. This can ei-
RS 232 for bi-directional data communication with a PC. ther be a commercial terminal program (e.g. Microsoft
When you connect the instrument with a PC you can: Hyper Terminal) or a customised program like
UltraDOC. Make sure that the serial communication
remote control the instrument via the PC, parameters on the PC are identical to those of the
transfer A-scans for documentation, instrument.

transfer instrument settings in ASCII format, The data transmission parameters are as follows:

transfer reports from stored datasets, Baud rate: 0 (no transmission), 300, 600, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600 (default), 19200,
transfers Datalogger jobs in ASCII format (option) 38400, and 57600
Word length: 8 data bits (fixed)
read and write datasets in binary format. Parity: none (fixed)
Stop bits: 2 (fixed)
Connecting a printer or a PC The baud rate can be set in the function BAUD-R in
You can connect the USM 35X to a printer or a PC the menu CFG1 from the third operating level.
using the special Krautkramer cables:
The settings on the USM 35X apply to most of the
PC: UD 20 (25-way) or UD 31 (9-way) printers and PCs. To ensure a perfect communication,
Printer: UD 31 (Seiko DPU) or UD 32 (Epson) please check the settings of the connected peripherals
and adjust them to the parameters of the USM 35X.
Please refer to chapter 2.

8-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Data exchange Interfaces and Peripherals

Printing data 8.6 Remote control


The USM 35X enables a direct printout of data, for
example a report including the echo display and the You can use a connected PC for the remote control of
instrument settings. the USM 35X.

To do this, select the printer driver in the function The data transfer is carried out by means of a remote
PRINTER (function group CFG1) and just press the control program and the corresponding remote control
key after having initialized and activated the printer. commands. These commands represent instructions
The data selected by you in the function COPYMOD referring to the individual functions of the USM 35X.
(function group CFG1) are printed. The program Crosstalk can for example be used as
For more details on this, please refer to chapter 6. remote control program under DOS. In Windows based
systems it is possible to use e.g. the Terminal program.

After the remote control program has been started and


the program interface has been configured, the com-
mands are input via the keyboard of the computer. In
this connection, please observe the following differen-
tiation:

Interrogation of a value or state of a USM 35X


function using the command structure:

<ESC> <COMMAND> <RETURN>

The USM 35X transmits the value of the current setting.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-9

Data exchange Interfaces and Peripherals

Printing data 8.6 Remote control


The USM 35X enables a direct printout of data, for
example a report including the echo display and the You can use a connected PC for the remote control of
instrument settings. the USM 35X.

To do this, select the printer driver in the function The data transfer is carried out by means of a remote
PRINTER (function group CFG1) and just press the control program and the corresponding remote control
key after having initialized and activated the printer. commands. These commands represent instructions
The data selected by you in the function COPYMOD referring to the individual functions of the USM 35X.
(function group CFG1) are printed. The program Crosstalk can for example be used as
For more details on this, please refer to chapter 6. remote control program under DOS. In Windows based
systems it is possible to use e.g. the Terminal program.

After the remote control program has been started and


the program interface has been configured, the com-
mands are input via the keyboard of the computer. In
this connection, please observe the following differen-
tiation:

Interrogation of a value or state of a USM 35X


function using the command structure:

<ESC> <COMMAND> <RETURN>

The USM 35X transmits the value of the current setting.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-9


Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Entry of a new value or state of a function using the Setting of the display width to 192 mm:
command structure:
<ESC>dw 19200 <RETURN>
<ESC> <COMMAND> <SPACE> <VALUE> <RE TURN> A resolution of 0.1 means:
All values are entered or transmitted by the USM 35X
The USM 35X transmits the value of a function multi-
without a comma or a point. The resolution of the func-
plied by the factor of 10. The entry of a value must be
tion should therefore be observed with all values. The
done multiplied by the factor of 10.
resolution of a function applies to the entire value
range of that function. Example:
A resolution of 0.01 means: Setting of the gain to 51.5 dB
The USM 35X transmits the value of a function multi- <ESC>db 515 <RETURN>
plied by the factor of 100. The entry of a value must be
done multiplied by the factor of 100. A resolution of 1 means:

Examples The USM 35X transmits the value of a function without


multiplication. The entry of a value must be done with-
Setting of the display delay to 72.39 mm: out any multiplication.
<ESC>dd 7239 <RETURN> Example:
Setting of the display width to 72.3 mm: Setting the response threshold of gate a to 41 %:
<ESC>dw 7230 <RETURN> <ESC>at 41 <RETURN>

8-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Entry of a new value or state of a function using the Setting of the display width to 192 mm:
command structure:
<ESC>dw 19200 <RETURN>
<ESC> <COMMAND> <SPACE> <VALUE> <RE TURN> A resolution of 0.1 means:
All values are entered or transmitted by the USM 35X
The USM 35X transmits the value of a function multi-
without a comma or a point. The resolution of the func-
plied by the factor of 10. The entry of a value must be
tion should therefore be observed with all values. The
done multiplied by the factor of 10.
resolution of a function applies to the entire value
range of that function. Example:
A resolution of 0.01 means: Setting of the gain to 51.5 dB
The USM 35X transmits the value of a function multi- <ESC>db 515 <RETURN>
plied by the factor of 100. The entry of a value must be
done multiplied by the factor of 100. A resolution of 1 means:

Examples The USM 35X transmits the value of a function without


multiplication. The entry of a value must be done with-
Setting of the display delay to 72.39 mm: out any multiplication.
<ESC>dd 7239 <RETURN> Example:
Setting of the display width to 72.3 mm: Setting the response threshold of gate a to 41 %:
<ESC>dw 7230 <RETURN> <ESC>at 41 <RETURN>

8-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Syntax and timing


The syntax and timing of the communication with the
instrument is as follows:

With:

ESC = escape (ASCII CHR 27)

* = star (ASCII CHR 42)

AB = remote code of an instrument function

CR = carriage return (ASCII CHR 13)

|_| = Space (ASCII CHR 32)

n Bytes = function value of function AB

ETX = end of text (ASCII CHR 3)

LF = line feed (ASCII CHR 10)

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-11

Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Syntax and timing


The syntax and timing of the communication with the
instrument is as follows:

With:

ESC = escape (ASCII CHR 27)

* = star (ASCII CHR 42)

AB = remote code of an instrument function

CR = carriage return (ASCII CHR 13)

|_| = Space (ASCII CHR 32)

n Bytes = function value of function AB

ETX = end of text (ASCII CHR 3)

LF = line feed (ASCII CHR 10)

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-11


Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Transmission timing
As soon as the instrument has received the ESC
command, is will return the * which then will be
displayed on PC screen.

Then you key in the wanted remote code according


to the given table. The instrument echoes your
entries.

Finally you hit the [CR]-key on your keyboard or


send the CR-command (closing the remote
command).

The instrument will now return a blank, then the


related function value which may consist of several
Bytes, then the end of text character, and finally
the carriage return and the line feed character.

8-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Transmission timing
As soon as the instrument has received the ESC
command, is will return the * which then will be
displayed on PC screen.

Then you key in the wanted remote code according


to the given table. The instrument echoes your
entries.

Finally you hit the [CR]-key on your keyboard or


send the CR-command (closing the remote
command).

The instrument will now return a blank, then the


related function value which may consist of several
Bytes, then the end of text character, and finally
the carriage return and the line feed character.

8-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Example:
Request RANGE value from the USM 35X

Remote code of the range function is DW (display


width). Please note that numerical function values are
always returned as integer values with the given maxi-
mum resolution, here DW = 5000 means 50.00 mm.

Example:
Request reading at position 2 in the measurement line

Remote code of measurement position 2 is E2 (evalu-


ation 2). E2 = 10.81 means 10.81 mm (here sound
path of the echo in gate A had been displayed). Please
note that all readings are shown in that applicable
decimal format where the decimal separator is a dot.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-13

Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Example:
Request RANGE value from the USM 35X

Remote code of the range function is DW (display


width). Please note that numerical function values are
always returned as integer values with the given maxi-
mum resolution, here DW = 5000 means 50.00 mm.

Example:
Request reading at position 2 in the measurement line

Remote code of measurement position 2 is E2 (evalu-


ation 2). E2 = 10.81 means 10.81 mm (here sound
path of the echo in gate A had been displayed). Please
note that all readings are shown in that applicable
decimal format where the decimal separator is a dot.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-13


Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Changing a function value


Key in [ESC] DW [Space] 2000 [CR] in order to set
the range to 20.00 mm:

Please note that you must key in the function value as


an integer with the maximum given resolution, here
2000 for the range of 20 mm.

Alphanumerical entries
Key in [ESC] DN [Space] Weld inspection B 45/2
[CR] in order to enter the dataset name (DATNAME)
Weld inspection B 45/2. All alphanumerical entries
may have a maximum length of 24 characters. In case
the string length exceeds 24 characters, it will auto-
matically be cut to 24 characters.

With the other alpahnumerical fields in the TESTINF


table you may easily describe the dataset.

8-14 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Changing a function value


Key in [ESC] DW [Space] 2000 [CR] in order to set
the range to 20.00 mm:

Please note that you must key in the function value as


an integer with the maximum given resolution, here
2000 for the range of 20 mm.

Alphanumerical entries
Key in [ESC] DN [Space] Weld inspection B 45/2
[CR] in order to enter the dataset name (DATNAME)
Weld inspection B 45/2. All alphanumerical entries
may have a maximum length of 24 characters. In case
the string length exceeds 24 characters, it will auto-
matically be cut to 24 characters.

With the other alpahnumerical fields in the TESTINF


table you may easily describe the dataset.

8-14 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Transfer of datasets
A total of 800 datasets (complete instrument setup
including A-scan) can be stored in the instrument. The
stored datasets including the actual setting (dataset # 0)
can be transferred to the PC in compressed binary
format for archiving purposes. If required, the datasets
may be downloaded back to the insturment for re-use
or echo comparison. This bi-directional dataset trans-
fer is part of the software UltraDOC.

Actual dataset (# 0) from the instrument to the PC:

v1 ... vn describes the software version of the USM, bytes


b1 ... bn contain the instrument setting including A-scan.
In order to store this information you must write the
transferred bytes v1 ... vn, CR, LF, b1 ... bn into a file.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-15

Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Transfer of datasets
A total of 800 datasets (complete instrument setup
including A-scan) can be stored in the instrument. The
stored datasets including the actual setting (dataset # 0)
can be transferred to the PC in compressed binary
format for archiving purposes. If required, the datasets
may be downloaded back to the insturment for re-use
or echo comparison. This bi-directional dataset trans-
fer is part of the software UltraDOC.

Actual dataset (# 0) from the instrument to the PC:

v1 ... vn describes the software version of the USM, bytes


b1 ... bn contain the instrument setting including A-scan.
In order to store this information you must write the
transferred bytes v1 ... vn, CR, LF, b1 ... bn into a file.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-15


Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Dataset file from the PC to the instruments dataset


#1:

*) at this time the instruments waits for the reception of


the bytes v1 ... vn CR LF b1 ... bn. The instrument now
checks whether received dataset is compatible with
the current software version of the instrument, and
whether the dataset is valid (correct checksum).

8-16 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Dataset file from the PC to the instruments dataset


#1:

*) at this time the instruments waits for the reception of


the bytes v1 ... vn CR LF b1 ... bn. The instrument now
checks whether received dataset is compatible with
the current software version of the instrument, and
whether the dataset is valid (correct checksum).

8-16 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Functions and remote control codes Function Code Range/Default Resolution

Presettings are in bold-face type. You will find a brief aLOGIC AM 0 = off 1
description of all functions in chapter 9.1 Function 1 = pos
2 = neg
directory.

If not otherwise stated, all values refer to steel, AMPLCOR** AC -25 to +25 dB / 0 0.1
C = 5920 m/s. ANAMODE AQ 0 = 0 volt
1 = 5 volts
The functions marked with * are only available in the
USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S (DAC evaluation), the ANGLE PA 0 - 90 / 0 0.1
functions marked with ** are only available in the
USM 35X S (DGS evaluation). A-SCAN AS 0 = stndard 1
1 = compare
Functions which are only availabe in connection with 2 = envelop
the Data Logger option are marked with *** (please 3 = peak b
4 = afreeze
also refer to the section Remote control in chapter
5 = bfreeze
Option Data Logger on this subject). 6 = cfreeze***

Read only functions are marked with R. aSTART AD 0 - 9999 mm / 35 0.01


0 - 250" / 1.500 0.001

aTHRSH AT 10 - 90 % / 40 1
-90 - -10 % additionally with rf

ATTENR BC 0 - 1101 dB 0.1

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-17

Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Functions and remote control codes Function Code Range/Default Resolution

Presettings are in bold-face type. You will find a brief aLOGIC AM 0 = off 1
description of all functions in chapter 9.1 Function 1 = pos
2 = neg
directory.

If not otherwise stated, all values refer to steel, AMPLCOR** AC -25 to +25 dB / 0 0.1
C = 5920 m/s. ANAMODE AQ 0 = 0 volt
1 = 5 volts
The functions marked with * are only available in the
USM 35X DAC and USM 35X S (DAC evaluation), the ANGLE PA 0 - 90 / 0 0.1
functions marked with ** are only available in the
USM 35X S (DGS evaluation). A-SCAN AS 0 = stndard 1
1 = compare
Functions which are only availabe in connection with 2 = envelop
the Data Logger option are marked with *** (please 3 = peak b
4 = afreeze
also refer to the section Remote control in chapter
5 = bfreeze
Option Data Logger on this subject). 6 = cfreeze***

Read only functions are marked with R. aSTART AD 0 - 9999 mm / 35 0.01


0 - 250" / 1.500 0.001

aTHRSH AT 10 - 90 % / 40 1
-90 - -10 % additionally with rf

ATTENR BC 0 - 1101 dB 0.1

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-17


Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

ATT-OBJ** AO 0 - 100 dB/m / 0 0.1 BOLDLI DV 0 = off


1=L
ATT-REF** AR 0 - 100 dB/m / 0 0.1 2=M
3=H
aWIDTH AW 0.1 - 9999 mm / 40 0.01 4=U
0.004 - 250" / 1.500 0.001 5=T
6=a
BAUD-R BR 0=0
1= 300 bSTART 2D 0 - 9999 mm / 85 0.01
2 = 600 0 - 250" / 3.500 0.001
3 = 1200
4 = 2400 bTHRSH 2T 10 - 90 % / 30 1
5 = 4800 -90 - -10 % additionally with rf
6 = 9600
7 = 19200 bWIDTH 2W 0.1 - 9999 mm / 40 0.01
8 = 38400 0.004 - 250" / 1.500 0.001
9 = 57600
CAL CA read only
bLOGIC 2L 0 = off 1
1 = pos COLOR CH 0 = off
2 = neg 1=1
3 = a trig 2=2

COMMENT CO alphanumerical input

8-18 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

ATT-OBJ** AO 0 - 100 dB/m / 0 0.1 BOLDLI DV 0 = off


1=L
ATT-REF** AR 0 - 100 dB/m / 0 0.1 2=M
3=H
aWIDTH AW 0.1 - 9999 mm / 40 0.01 4=U
0.004 - 250" / 1.500 0.001 5=T
6=a
BAUD-R BR 0=0
1= 300 bSTART 2D 0 - 9999 mm / 85 0.01
2 = 600 0 - 250" / 3.500 0.001
3 = 1200
4 = 2400 bTHRSH 2T 10 - 90 % / 30 1
5 = 4800 -90 - -10 % additionally with rf
6 = 9600
7 = 19200 bWIDTH 2W 0.1 - 9999 mm / 40 0.01
8 = 38400 0.004 - 250" / 1.500 0.001
9 = 57600
CAL CA read only
bLOGIC 2L 0 = off 1
1 = pos COLOR CH 0 = off
2 = neg 1=1
3 = a trig 2=2

COMMENT CO alphanumerical input

8-18 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

COPYMOD CM 0 = hardcpy 1 D eff** XD 3 - 35 mm / 9.7 0.01


1 = report 0.120 - 1.400" / 0.380 0.001
2 = meas P1 (only for probe-# 0)
3 = pardump
4 = PCX D-DELAY DD -10 - 1024 mm / 0 0.01
5 = store -0.3 - 40" / 0 0.001
6 = datalog***
7 = off DELALL EX 0 = off
8 = special 1 = on

DACECHO* TE 0 - 10 / 0 1 DELETE EA 0 = off 1


1 = on
DACMOD* TM 0 = off 1
1 = DAC DEL-VEL** VV 1000 - 15000 m/s / 2730 1
2 = TCG (only for probe-# 0)

DAMPING PG 0 = low 1 DGS-CRV** DU 0.5 - 35 mm / 3.0 0.01


1 = high 0.02 - 1.400 / 0.1 0.001

DGSMENU T5 0 = off
DATE DE numerical input
1 = on
e.g. 26-01-99
DGSMOD** DS 0 = off 1
DATNAME DN alphanumerical input 1 = on

DBSTEP ST 6.5 ... 20 dB 0.1 DGS-REF** DR 0 = off 1


1 = on

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-19

Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

COPYMOD CM 0 = hardcpy 1 D eff** XD 3 - 35 mm / 9.7 0.01


1 = report 0.120 - 1.400" / 0.380 0.001
2 = meas P1 (only for probe-# 0)
3 = pardump
4 = PCX D-DELAY DD -10 - 1024 mm / 0 0.01
5 = store -0.3 - 40" / 0 0.001
6 = datalog***
7 = off DELALL EX 0 = off
8 = special 1 = on

DACECHO* TE 0 - 10 / 0 1 DELETE EA 0 = off 1


1 = on
DACMOD* TM 0 = off 1
1 = DAC DEL-VEL** VV 1000 - 15000 m/s / 2730 1
2 = TCG (only for probe-# 0)

DAMPING PG 0 = low 1 DGS-CRV** DU 0.5 - 35 mm / 3.0 0.01


1 = high 0.02 - 1.400 / 0.1 0.001

DGSMENU T5 0 = off
DATE DE numerical input
1 = on
e.g. 26-01-99
DGSMOD** DS 0 = off 1
DATNAME DN alphanumerical input 1 = on

DBSTEP ST 6.5 ... 20 dB 0.1 DGS-REF** DR 0 = off 1


1 = on

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-19


Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

DIALOG DG 0 = German 1 DUAL DM 0 = off 1


1 = English 1 = on
2 = French
3 = Italian EVAMOD EM 0 = DAC 1
4 = Spanish 1 = DGS
5 = Portuguese 2 = REF
6 = Dutch 5 = JISDAC
7 = Swedish
8 = Slovenian FILLED FI 0 = off 1
9 = Romanian 1 = on
10 = Finnish
11 = Czech FINE G FG 10 - +30 / 0 1
12 = Danish
13 = Hungarian
FLAWIND FB alphanumerical input
14 = Croatian
15 = Russian
FLAWLEN FL 0 - 999 mm / 0 0.01
16 = Slovakian
0 - 40" / 0 0.001
17 = Norwegian
18 = Polish
19 = Japanese FREQU FR 0 = 0.5 - 4 MHz 1
1 = 2 - 20 MHz
DIAMET OD 10 - 2000 mm / 0.4 - 800" 0.1 / 0.01 2 = 0.8 - 8 MHz
800.01" = flat 3 = 0.2 - 1 MHz

DIR T3 0 = off GAIN DB 0 - 110 dB / 30 0.1


1 = on
HORN HO 0 = off 1
1 = on

8-20 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

DIALOG DG 0 = German 1 DUAL DM 0 = off 1


1 = English 1 = on
2 = French
3 = Italian EVAMOD EM 0 = DAC 1
4 = Spanish 1 = DGS
5 = Portuguese 2 = REF
6 = Dutch 5 = JISDAC
7 = Swedish
8 = Slovenian FILLED FI 0 = off 1
9 = Romanian 1 = on
10 = Finnish
11 = Czech FINE G FG 10 - +30 / 0 1
12 = Danish
13 = Hungarian
FLAWIND FB alphanumerical input
14 = Croatian
15 = Russian
FLAWLEN FL 0 - 999 mm / 0 0.01
16 = Slovakian
0 - 40" / 0 0.001
17 = Norwegian
18 = Polish
19 = Japanese FREQU FR 0 = 0.5 - 4 MHz 1
1 = 2 - 20 MHz
DIAMET OD 10 - 2000 mm / 0.4 - 800" 0.1 / 0.01 2 = 0.8 - 8 MHz
800.01" = flat 3 = 0.2 - 1 MHz

DIR T3 0 = off GAIN DB 0 - 110 dB / 30 0.1


1 = on
HORN HO 0 = off 1
1 = on

8-20 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

INDICAR BA -1101 - 1101 dB 0.1 PRBFREQ** XF 0.5 - 10.0 MHz 0.04

LIGHT LT 0 = off 1 PRBNAME** PN alphanumerical input


1 = on
PREVIEW T2 0 = off
MAGNIFY MA 0 = off 1 1 = on
1 = aGAT
2 = bGAT PRF-MOD PF 10 steps:
0 = step 1 1
MEAS-P1 M1 Setting range see S-DISP 1 1 = step 2
MEAS-P2 M2 2 = step 3
MEAS-P3 M3 3 = step 4
MEAS-P4 M4 4 = step 5
5 = step 6
MTLVEL SV 1000 - 15000 m/s / 5920 1 6 = step 7
40 - 600 "/ms / 233 0.1 7 = step 8
8 = step 9
OBJECT OB alphanumerical input 9 = step 10

OFFSET* TO 0 - 14 dB / 0 0.5 PRINTER PR 0 = Epson 1


1 = HP Laserjet
OPERAT PE alphanumerical input 2 = HP Deskjet
3 = DPU-41x
P-DELAY PD 0 - 199.99 s / 0 0.01 4 = HP Laserjet 1200 series
5 = HP Deskjet 1200 series
POWER PI 0 = low 1
1 = high

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-21

Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

INDICAR BA -1101 - 1101 dB 0.1 PRBFREQ** XF 0.5 - 10.0 MHz 0.04

LIGHT LT 0 = off 1 PRBNAME** PN alphanumerical input


1 = on
PREVIEW T2 0 = off
MAGNIFY MA 0 = off 1 1 = on
1 = aGAT
2 = bGAT PRF-MOD PF 10 steps:
0 = step 1 1
MEAS-P1 M1 Setting range see S-DISP 1 1 = step 2
MEAS-P2 M2 2 = step 3
MEAS-P3 M3 3 = step 4
MEAS-P4 M4 4 = step 5
5 = step 6
MTLVEL SV 1000 - 15000 m/s / 5920 1 6 = step 7
40 - 600 "/ms / 233 0.1 7 = step 8
8 = step 9
OBJECT OB alphanumerical input 9 = step 10

OFFSET* TO 0 - 14 dB / 0 0.5 PRINTER PR 0 = Epson 1


1 = HP Laserjet
OPERAT PE alphanumerical input 2 = HP Deskjet
3 = DPU-41x
P-DELAY PD 0 - 199.99 s / 0 0.01 4 = HP Laserjet 1200 series
5 = HP Deskjet 1200 series
POWER PI 0 = low 1
1 = high

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-21


Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

PROBE-#** PB 0 = variable / alphanumerical input RECTIFY RF 0 = full-w 1


1 = B1-S 13 = SWB45-2 1= pos hw
2 = B2-S 14 = SWB60-2 2 = neg hw
3 = B4-s 15 = SWB70-2 3 = rf
4 = MB2-S 16 = SWB45-5
5 = MB4-S 17 = SWB60-5 REFECHO RC 0 = no ref.
6 = MB5-S 18 = SWB70-5 1 = ref. stored
7 = MWB45-2 19 = WB45-1
8 = MWB60-2 20 = WB60-1 REFECHO** RE 0 = BW 1
9 = MWB70-2 21 = WB70-1 1 = SDH
10 = MWB45-4 22 = WB45-2 2 = FDH
11 = MWB60-4 23 = WB60-2
12 = MWB70-4 24 = WB70-2 REFMODE RO 0 = off
1 = on
RANGE DW 0.5 - 4 MHz / 0.2 - 1 MHz:
0.5 - 9999 mm / 250 0.01 REFRNCER BB 0 - 1101 dB 0.1
0.02 - 390" / 10 0.001
REFSIZE** RS 0.5 - 10 mm / 3 0.01
2 - 20 / 0.8 - 8 MHz:
0.5 - 1420 mm / 250 0.01 REJECT RJ 0 - 80 % / 0 1
0.02 - 56" / 10 0.001
SCALE SE 0 = measval
RATINGR BD -1101 - 1101 db 0.1
1 = snd-pth.
2 = div.
RECALL RD 0 = off 1
1 = on

8-22 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

PROBE-#** PB 0 = variable / alphanumerical input RECTIFY RF 0 = full-w 1


1 = B1-S 13 = SWB45-2 1= pos hw
2 = B2-S 14 = SWB60-2 2 = neg hw
3 = B4-s 15 = SWB70-2 3 = rf
4 = MB2-S 16 = SWB45-5
5 = MB4-S 17 = SWB60-5 REFECHO RC 0 = no ref.
6 = MB5-S 18 = SWB70-5 1 = ref. stored
7 = MWB45-2 19 = WB45-1
8 = MWB60-2 20 = WB60-1 REFECHO** RE 0 = BW 1
9 = MWB70-2 21 = WB70-1 1 = SDH
10 = MWB45-4 22 = WB45-2 2 = FDH
11 = MWB60-4 23 = WB60-2
12 = MWB70-4 24 = WB70-2 REFMODE RO 0 = off
1 = on
RANGE DW 0.5 - 4 MHz / 0.2 - 1 MHz:
0.5 - 9999 mm / 250 0.01 REFRNCER BB 0 - 1101 dB 0.1
0.02 - 390" / 10 0.001
REFSIZE** RS 0.5 - 10 mm / 3 0.01
2 - 20 / 0.8 - 8 MHz:
0.5 - 1420 mm / 250 0.01 REJECT RJ 0 - 80 % / 0 1
0.02 - 56" / 10 0.001
SCALE SE 0 = measval
RATINGR BD -1101 - 1101 db 0.1
1 = snd-pth.
2 = div.
RECALL RD 0 = off 1
1 = on

8-22 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

SCHEME CS 0 = green/black SETTING T4 0 = off


1 = orange/black 1 = on
2 = black/white
3 = black/yellow SET-# ND 1 - 800 / 1 1

S-DISP VS 0=off 1=Sa 1 S-REF1 R1 0 - 5000 mm / 50 0.01


2=Sb 3=Sc*** 0 - 200" / 2.0 0.001
4=Sc-a*** 5=Sc-b***
6=Sb-a*** 7=Ha % S-REF2 R2 0 - 5000 mm / 100 0.01
8=Hb % 9=Hc %*** 0 - 200" / 4.0 0.001
10=Ha dB 11=Hb dB
12=Hc dB*** 13=R-start STO-INF SC 0 = off 1
14=R-end 15=Da 1 = on
16=Db 17=Dc***
18=Pa 19=Pb STORE SD 0 = off 1
20=Pc*** 21=Ra 1 = on
22=Rb 23=Rc***
24=ERS 25=Gt dB SURFACE SU alphanumerical input
26=Ha %crv 27=Hb %crv
28=Hc %crv*** 29=Alarm
T-CORR * DC -24 - +24 dB / 0 0.5
30=DGS-Crv 31=freeJob***
32=freeLoc*** 33=freeAsc***
TESTINF T1 0 = off
34=freeLoJ 35=lastLoc
1 = on
36=La 37=Lb
38=Lc 39=Gatewid
40=Defdpth 41=class THICKNE TH 1 - 9999 mm / 25 0.01
42=DAC dB 43=LOC-# 0.05 - 400" / 1 0.001
44=Gr dB

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-23

Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Function Code Range/Default Resolution

SCHEME CS 0 = green/black SETTING T4 0 = off


1 = orange/black 1 = on
2 = black/white
3 = black/yellow SET-# ND 1 - 800 / 1 1

S-DISP VS 0=off 1=Sa 1 S-REF1 R1 0 - 5000 mm / 50 0.01


2=Sb 3=Sc*** 0 - 200" / 2.0 0.001
4=Sc-a*** 5=Sc-b***
6=Sb-a*** 7=Ha % S-REF2 R2 0 - 5000 mm / 100 0.01
8=Hb % 9=Hc %*** 0 - 200" / 4.0 0.001
10=Ha dB 11=Hb dB
12=Hc dB*** 13=R-start STO-INF SC 0 = off 1
14=R-end 15=Da 1 = on
16=Db 17=Dc***
18=Pa 19=Pb STORE SD 0 = off 1
20=Pc*** 21=Ra 1 = on
22=Rb 23=Rc***
24=ERS 25=Gt dB SURFACE SU alphanumerical input
26=Ha %crv 27=Hb %crv
28=Hc %crv*** 29=Alarm
T-CORR * DC -24 - +24 dB / 0 0.5
30=DGS-Crv 31=freeJob***
32=freeLoc*** 33=freeAsc***
TESTINF T1 0 = off
34=freeLoJ 35=lastLoc
1 = on
36=La 37=Lb
38=Lc 39=Gatewid
40=Defdpth 41=class THICKNE TH 1 - 9999 mm / 25 0.01
42=DAC dB 43=LOC-# 0.05 - 400" / 1 0.001
44=Gr dB

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-23


Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Other remote control codes


TIME TI numerical input, e.g. 12:30:00 Code Function/description

TOF AF 0 = flank 1 < Select the next left sided menu


1 = peak
2 = jflank > Select the next right sided menu

UNIT UN 0 = mm 1 AG dB-Difference from the reference gain (ref. echo


1 = inch at 80 %) to the registration gain (maximum of
selected DGS curve at 80 %), read only
VGA VG 0 = off
1 = on AP Analog output setting
0 = amplitude
X-POS XP 0 - 999 mm / 0 0.01 1 = time of flight
0 - 40" / 0 0.001
DA A-scan amplitudes transferred as binary data
X-VALUE XV 0 - 100 mm / 0 0.01
0 - 40" / 0 0.001 DV Send the DAC points in tics and dB, DAC, read only

Y-POS YP 0 - 999 mm / 0 0.01 E1 Read value form measurement line (position 1)


0 - 40" / 0 0.001 E2 Read value form measurement line (position 2)
E3 Read value form measurement line (position 3)
E4 Read value form measurement line (position 4)
E5 Read value displayed in the A-scan

EL Send the contents of the LCD as binary data


stream, read only

8-24 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Function Code Range/Default Resolution Other remote control codes


TIME TI numerical input, e.g. 12:30:00 Code Function/description

TOF AF 0 = flank 1 < Select the next left sided menu


1 = peak
2 = jflank > Select the next right sided menu

UNIT UN 0 = mm 1 AG dB-Difference from the reference gain (ref. echo


1 = inch at 80 %) to the registration gain (maximum of
selected DGS curve at 80 %), read only
VGA VG 0 = off
1 = on AP Analog output setting
0 = amplitude
X-POS XP 0 - 999 mm / 0 0.01 1 = time of flight
0 - 40" / 0 0.001
DA A-scan amplitudes transferred as binary data
X-VALUE XV 0 - 100 mm / 0 0.01
0 - 40" / 0 0.001 DV Send the DAC points in tics and dB, DAC, read only

Y-POS YP 0 - 999 mm / 0 0.01 E1 Read value form measurement line (position 1)


0 - 40" / 0 0.001 E2 Read value form measurement line (position 2)
E3 Read value form measurement line (position 3)
E4 Read value form measurement line (position 4)
E5 Read value displayed in the A-scan

EL Send the contents of the LCD as binary data


stream, read only

8-24 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Code Function/description Code Function/description

EV Read alarm LED status: TZ Zoom on/off:


0 = no alarm 0 = off
1 = alarm in A 1 = on
2 = alarm in B
3 = alarm in A+B UD Send data set as binary data

HD Editable header data from report transferred as UR Read data set as binary data
ASCII-format data

I1 Set information line in the startup screen


I2 Set information line in the startup screen
(up to 39 characters)

ID Read instrument software version

RG Reference gain (reference echo at 80 %), read only

SL Scroll home: selection of the first function in every


function group and of the left function group in every
function group line.

TF Freeze on/off:
0 = off
1 = on

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-25

Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Code Function/description Code Function/description

EV Read alarm LED status: TZ Zoom on/off:


0 = no alarm 0 = off
1 = alarm in A 1 = on
2 = alarm in B
3 = alarm in A+B UD Send data set as binary data

HD Editable header data from report transferred as UR Read data set as binary data
ASCII-format data

I1 Set information line in the startup screen


I2 Set information line in the startup screen
(up to 39 characters)

ID Read instrument software version

RG Reference gain (reference echo at 80 %), read only

SL Scroll home: selection of the first function in every


function group and of the left function group in every
function group line.

TF Freeze on/off:
0 = off
1 = on

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-25


Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Control codes for the rotary knobs/ Function Key Code Range

function keys
ENTER R off / on
Function Key Code Range

Left-hand G+ increment level 10 1st/2nd operation level


rotary knob/ G- decrement
gain

Right-hand K+ increment
rotary knob K- decrement

dB-STEP P 0 = 0.0
1 = 0.5
2 = 1.0
3 = 2.0
4 = 6.0
5 = 6.5 20

FREEZE F off / on

ZOOM Z off / on

COPY C off / on

8-26 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

Control codes for the rotary knobs/ Function Key Code Range

function keys
ENTER R off / on
Function Key Code Range

Left-hand G+ increment level 10 1st/2nd operation level


rotary knob/ G- decrement
gain

Right-hand K+ increment
rotary knob K- decrement

dB-STEP P 0 = 0.0
1 = 0.5
2 = 1.0
3 = 2.0
4 = 6.0
5 = 6.5 20

FREEZE F off / on

ZOOM Z off / on

COPY C off / on

8-26 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Function Key Code Function Key Code

BASE 5 MEAS 5

PULS 6 MSEL 6

RECV 7 LCD 7

aGAT 8 CFG1 8

bGAT 9 CFG2 9

CAL 5
Function Key Code
REF/DAC/ 6
DGS/JDAC
first 1
TRIG 7
second 2
MEM 8
third 3
DATA 9
fourth 4

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-27

Remote control Interfaces and Peripherals

Function Key Code Function Key Code

BASE 5 MEAS 5

PULS 6 MSEL 6

RECV 7 LCD 7

aGAT 8 CFG1 8

bGAT 9 CFG2 9

CAL 5
Function Key Code
REF/DAC/ 6
DGS/JDAC
first 1
TRIG 7
second 2
MEM 8
third 3
DATA 9
fourth 4

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 8-27


Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

A Attention: In the interests of security, insert additional read com-


mands before reading the sound path, e.g.:
In rare cases concerning remote control sequences,
reading measurement values directly after changing a Command Answer Description
function value in the USM 35X, there could be errors as
long as the instrument has not ended setting the value. ...
In such cases, additional commands must be inserted <ESC>F<RETURN> A-scan freeze
<ESC>DB<RETURN> 580 Read dB setting
into the remote control sequence before the measure- <ESC>DB<RETURN> 580 Read dB setting
ment values are read. <ESC>DB<RETURN> 580 Read dB setting
<ESC>DB<RETURN> 580 Read dB setting
Example: <ESC>E3<RETURN> 50,74 Read sound path
<ESC>F<RETURN> Disable A-scan freeze
If you create a remote control sequence, by which the ...
sound path of an echo is read after freezing the A-
scan, the command chain would be as follows: With these measures you ensure that sufficient time
has passed in order to completely execute the previ-
Command Answer Description
ous command (display freeze) before transferring the
sound path. Finally, check your remote control se-
<ESC>F<RETURN> A-scan freeze
<ESC>E3<RETURN> 50,74 Read sound path
quence to see that the measurement values can be
<ESC>F<RETURN> Disable A-scan freeze correctly read, and add further read commands if nec-
... essary.

8-28 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Interfaces and Peripherals Remote control

A Attention: In the interests of security, insert additional read com-


mands before reading the sound path, e.g.:
In rare cases concerning remote control sequences,
reading measurement values directly after changing a Command Answer Description
function value in the USM 35X, there could be errors as
long as the instrument has not ended setting the value. ...
In such cases, additional commands must be inserted <ESC>F<RETURN> A-scan freeze
<ESC>DB<RETURN> 580 Read dB setting
into the remote control sequence before the measure- <ESC>DB<RETURN> 580 Read dB setting
ment values are read. <ESC>DB<RETURN> 580 Read dB setting
<ESC>DB<RETURN> 580 Read dB setting
Example: <ESC>E3<RETURN> 50,74 Read sound path
<ESC>F<RETURN> Disable A-scan freeze
If you create a remote control sequence, by which the ...
sound path of an echo is read after freezing the A-
scan, the command chain would be as follows: With these measures you ensure that sufficient time
has passed in order to completely execute the previ-
Command Answer Description
ous command (display freeze) before transferring the
sound path. Finally, check your remote control se-
<ESC>F<RETURN> A-scan freeze
<ESC>E3<RETURN> 50,74 Read sound path
quence to see that the measurement values can be
<ESC>F<RETURN> Disable A-scan freeze correctly read, and add further read commands if nec-
... essary.

8-28 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Appendix 9

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-1

Appendix 9

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-1


Appendix Function directory

9.1 Function directory Function Function group Description

ATT-REF** DGS Sound attenuation in the


The functions marked with * are only available on the reference block
USM 35X DAC / USM 35X S (DAC evaluation mode),
those market with ** are exclusively available on the ATT-OBJ** DGS Sound attenuation in the
test object
USM 35X S (DGS evaluation mode).
aWIDTH aGAT Width of the gate A
Function Function group Description

BAUD-R CFG1 Baud rate for serial port


aLOGIC aGAT Evaluation logic of the gate A
transmission
AMPLCOR** DGS Amplitude correction
bLOGIC bGAT Evaluation logic in the gate B
ANAMOD CFG2 Setting of the analog output
BOLDLI JDAC Selection and emphasizing of
registration curve
ANGLE TRIG Entry of the angle for calculating
the (reduced) projection
bSTART bGAT Starting point of the gate B
distance (angle-beam probes)

bTHRSH bGAT Starting point of the gate B


A-SCAN MEAS Settings of the A-scan

bWIDTH bGAT Width of the gate B


aSTART aGAT Starting point of the gate A

CAL CAL Semiautomatic calibration


aTHRSH aGAT Threshold of the gate A

COLOR TRIG Marking of legs


ATTEN DGS Sound attenuation in the test
piece
COMMENT DATA Comment

9-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix Function directory

9.1 Function directory Function Function group Description

ATT-REF** DGS Sound attenuation in the


The functions marked with * are only available on the reference block
USM 35X DAC / USM 35X S (DAC evaluation mode),
those market with ** are exclusively available on the ATT-OBJ** DGS Sound attenuation in the
test object
USM 35X S (DGS evaluation mode).
aWIDTH aGAT Width of the gate A
Function Function group Description

BAUD-R CFG1 Baud rate for serial port


aLOGIC aGAT Evaluation logic of the gate A
transmission
AMPLCOR** DGS Amplitude correction
bLOGIC bGAT Evaluation logic in the gate B
ANAMOD CFG2 Setting of the analog output
BOLDLI JDAC Selection and emphasizing of
registration curve
ANGLE TRIG Entry of the angle for calculating
the (reduced) projection
bSTART bGAT Starting point of the gate B
distance (angle-beam probes)

bTHRSH bGAT Starting point of the gate B


A-SCAN MEAS Settings of the A-scan

bWIDTH bGAT Width of the gate B


aSTART aGAT Starting point of the gate A

CAL CAL Semiautomatic calibration


aTHRSH aGAT Threshold of the gate A

COLOR TRIG Marking of legs


ATTEN DGS Sound attenuation in the test
piece
COMMENT DATA Comment

9-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Function directory Appendix

Function Function group Description Function Function group Description

COPYMOD CFG1 Assignment of the key DGS-CRV** DGS Recording curve for DGS
evaluation mode
DACECHO* DAC/JDAC Recording of a reference echo
for the DAC DGSMENU** DGS Activating/Deactivating the DGS
menu table for selecting the
DACMODE* DAC/JDAC Activating/Deactivating the DAC probe and further DGS settings

DAMPING PULS Damping of the probes DGSMODE** DGS Activating/Deactivating DGS


oscillating circuit evaluation mode

DATE CFG2 Current date DGS-REF** DGS Recording of DGS reference


echo
dBSTEP RECV User-programmable gain step
DIALOG CFG1 Selecting the language
D-DELAY BASE Setting of the display start
DIAMET TRIG Change between plane-parallel
D eff** DGS Effective element diameter of and circular curved test
the probe used components

DELALL MEM Deleting all stored data sets DIR DATA Dataset directory

DELETE MEM Deleting a stored data set DUAL PULS Separation of pulser and
receiver
DEL-VEL** DGS Material velocity for probe delay
EVAMOD CFG2 Switchover REF DAC DGS
JDAC

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-3

Function directory Appendix

Function Function group Description Function Function group Description

COPYMOD CFG1 Assignment of the key DGS-CRV** DGS Recording curve for DGS
evaluation mode
DACECHO* DAC/JDAC Recording of a reference echo
for the DAC DGSMENU** DGS Activating/Deactivating the DGS
menu table for selecting the
DACMODE* DAC/JDAC Activating/Deactivating the DAC probe and further DGS settings

DAMPING PULS Damping of the probes DGSMODE** DGS Activating/Deactivating DGS


oscillating circuit evaluation mode

DATE CFG2 Current date DGS-REF** DGS Recording of DGS reference


echo
dBSTEP RECV User-programmable gain step
DIALOG CFG1 Selecting the language
D-DELAY BASE Setting of the display start
DIAMET TRIG Change between plane-parallel
D eff** DGS Effective element diameter of and circular curved test
the probe used components

DELALL MEM Deleting all stored data sets DIR DATA Dataset directory

DELETE MEM Deleting a stored data set DUAL PULS Separation of pulser and
receiver
DEL-VEL** DGS Material velocity for probe delay
EVAMOD CFG2 Switchover REF DAC DGS
JDAC

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-3


Appendix Function directory

Function Function group Description Function Function group Description

FILLED LCD Selecting the echo display mode MEAS-P1 MSEL Selection of measured values
(filled or normal) MEAS-P2 at four positions of the
MEAS-P3 measurment line
FINE G RECV Fine adjustment of gain within a MEAS-P4
range of approx. 4 dB in 40 steps
MTLVEL BASE Setting of the material sound
FLAWLEN DATA Flawlength velocity

FREQU RECV Selecting the frequency range OBJECT DATA Object description
for the connected probe
OFFSET* DAC/JDAC Offset for multiple DAC
GAIN left-hand Setting of the gain
rotary knob OPERAT DATA Name of the operator

HORN CFG2 Switching the acoustic alarm P-DELAY BASE Compensating for the probe
signal on/off delay line

INDICA AWS Flaw gain in dB POWER PULS Setting the power of the initial
for AWS evaluation pulse

LIGHT LCD Choice of lightning for PRBFREQ** DGS Probe frequency


the display
PRBNAME** DGS Probe name
MAGNIFY MEAS Gate spreading
PREVIEW DATA Dataset preview with A-scan

9-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix Function directory

Function Function group Description Function Function group Description

FILLED LCD Selecting the echo display mode MEAS-P1 MSEL Selection of measured values
(filled or normal) MEAS-P2 at four positions of the
MEAS-P3 measurment line
FINE G RECV Fine adjustment of gain within a MEAS-P4
range of approx. 4 dB in 40 steps
MTLVEL BASE Setting of the material sound
FLAWLEN DATA Flawlength velocity

FREQU RECV Selecting the frequency range OBJECT DATA Object description
for the connected probe
OFFSET* DAC/JDAC Offset for multiple DAC
GAIN left-hand Setting of the gain
rotary knob OPERAT DATA Name of the operator

HORN CFG2 Switching the acoustic alarm P-DELAY BASE Compensating for the probe
signal on/off delay line

INDICA AWS Flaw gain in dB POWER PULS Setting the power of the initial
for AWS evaluation pulse

LIGHT LCD Choice of lightning for PRBFREQ** DGS Probe frequency


the display
PRBNAME** DGS Probe name
MAGNIFY MEAS Gate spreading
PREVIEW DATA Dataset preview with A-scan

9-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Function directory Appendix

Function Function group Description Function Function group Description

PRF-MOD PULS Setting the pulse repetition REFRNCE AWS Reference gain in dB
frequency for AWS evaluation

PROBE-#** DGS Probe number REFSIZE** DGS Size of the reference reflector

PRINTER CFG1 Selecting the printer for the test REJECT RECV Suppression of unwanted or
report spurious echo indications

RANGE BASE Setting of the range in which the SCALE LCD Choice of display mode
measurement is made. for the measurement line

RATING AWS Flaw rating as dB value SCHEME LCD Choice of a color scheme for
the screen display
RECALL MEM Retrieving a stored data set
S-DISP MEAS Zoomed display of a selected
RECTIFY RECV Selection of rectification parameter

REFECHO REF For storing a reference echo SET-# MEM Number of the data set
for the measurement of
dB difference SETTING DATA Display of a function list

REFECHO** DGS Type of the reference reflextor S-REF1 CAL Reference echo 1 for calibration
used S-REF2 Reference echo 2 for calibration

REFMOD REF Activation of echo comparison STO-INF DATA Saving the current additional
information

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-5

Function directory Appendix

Function Function group Description Function Function group Description

PRF-MOD PULS Setting the pulse repetition REFRNCE AWS Reference gain in dB
frequency for AWS evaluation

PROBE-#** DGS Probe number REFSIZE** DGS Size of the reference reflector

PRINTER CFG1 Selecting the printer for the test REJECT RECV Suppression of unwanted or
report spurious echo indications

RANGE BASE Setting of the range in which the SCALE LCD Choice of display mode
measurement is made. for the measurement line

RATING AWS Flaw rating as dB value SCHEME LCD Choice of a color scheme for
the screen display
RECALL MEM Retrieving a stored data set
S-DISP MEAS Zoomed display of a selected
RECTIFY RECV Selection of rectification parameter

REFECHO REF For storing a reference echo SET-# MEM Number of the data set
for the measurement of
dB difference SETTING DATA Display of a function list

REFECHO** DGS Type of the reference reflextor S-REF1 CAL Reference echo 1 for calibration
used S-REF2 Reference echo 2 for calibration

REFMOD REF Activation of echo comparison STO-INF DATA Saving the current additional
information

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-5


Appendix Function directory

Function Function group Description Function Function group Description

STORE MEM Saving the data set X-VALUE TRIG Entry of the distance between
probe index (sound exit point)
SURFACE DATA Condition of surface and leading face of the
angle-beam probe
T-CORR* DAC/AVG/ Sensitivity correction, e.g. to
JDAC compensate for transfer losses Y-POS DATA Y-position coordinate

TESTINF DATA Saving additional information

THICKNE TRIG Entry of workpiece thickness


for calculation of real flaw depth

TIME CFG2 Current time

TOF MEAS Selection of the measuring


point for the gate

UNIT CFG1 Selecting the unit of


measurement mm or inch

VGA LCD Activating/Deactivating the VGA


output

X-POS DATA X-position coordinate

9-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix Function directory

Function Function group Description Function Function group Description

STORE MEM Saving the data set X-VALUE TRIG Entry of the distance between
probe index (sound exit point)
SURFACE DATA Condition of surface and leading face of the
angle-beam probe
T-CORR* DAC/AVG/ Sensitivity correction, e.g. to
JDAC compensate for transfer losses Y-POS DATA Y-position coordinate

TESTINF DATA Saving additional information

THICKNE TRIG Entry of workpiece thickness


for calculation of real flaw depth

TIME CFG2 Current time

TOF MEAS Selection of the measuring


point for the gate

UNIT CFG1 Selecting the unit of


measurement mm or inch

VGA LCD Activating/Deactivating the VGA


output

X-POS DATA X-position coordinate

9-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


EC declaration of conformity Appendix

9.2 EC declaration of conformity


We declare that the USM 35X conforms to the following
European directives:

89/336EEC (Electromagnetic compatibility)

The conformity of the above-mentioned product with the


regulations of the directive 89/336EEC is proven by the
observance of the standard specifications

EN 55011: 1998 Class A, Group 2 and

EN 61000-6-2: 1997

EN 61000-6-4: 1997.

The conformity of the above-mentioned product with the


regulations of the directive 73/23/EEC, amended by the
directive 93/68/EEC, is proven by the observance of
the standard specification

EN 61010-1: 2001.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-7

EC declaration of conformity Appendix

9.2 EC declaration of conformity


We declare that the USM 35X conforms to the following
European directives:

89/336EEC (Electromagnetic compatibility)

The conformity of the above-mentioned product with the


regulations of the directive 89/336EEC is proven by the
observance of the standard specifications

EN 55011: 1998 Class A, Group 2 and

EN 61000-6-2: 1997

EN 61000-6-4: 1997.

The conformity of the above-mentioned product with the


regulations of the directive 73/23/EEC, amended by the
directive 93/68/EEC, is proven by the observance of
the standard specification

EN 61010-1: 2001.

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-7


Appendix Manufacturer/Service addresses

9.3 Manufacturer/ If there is anything special that you would like to know
about the use, handling, operation and specifications of
Service addresses the instruments, please contact your nearest GE
Inspection Technologies representative or directly:
The Krautkramer USM 35X is manufactured by:
GE Inspection Technologies GmbH
GE Inspection Technologies GmbH
Robert-Bosch-Str. 3 Service-Center
D 50354 Hrth Robert-Bosch-Str. 3
D 50354 Hrth
Phone +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 111
Fax +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 402 or:

The USM 35X is manufactured according to state-of-the- Postfach 1363


art methods using high-quality components. Thorough D 50330 Hrth
in-process inspections or intermediate tests and a quality
Phone +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 111
management system certified to DIN EN ISO 9001
Fax +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 402
ensure an optimum quality of conformance of the
instrument.

Should you nevertheless detect an error on your


instrument, switch the instrument off and remove the
batteries. Inform your local GE Inspection Technologies
Service indicating the error and describing it.

Keep the shipping container for any repairs possibly


required which cannot be made on the spot.

9-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix Manufacturer/Service addresses

9.3 Manufacturer/ If there is anything special that you would like to know
about the use, handling, operation and specifications of
Service addresses the instruments, please contact your nearest GE
Inspection Technologies representative or directly:
The Krautkramer USM 35X is manufactured by:
GE Inspection Technologies GmbH
GE Inspection Technologies GmbH
Robert-Bosch-Str. 3 Service-Center
D 50354 Hrth Robert-Bosch-Str. 3
D 50354 Hrth
Phone +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 111
Fax +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 402 or:

The USM 35X is manufactured according to state-of-the- Postfach 1363


art methods using high-quality components. Thorough D 50330 Hrth
in-process inspections or intermediate tests and a quality
Phone +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 111
management system certified to DIN EN ISO 9001
Fax +49 (0) 22 33 - 601 402
ensure an optimum quality of conformance of the
instrument.

Should you nevertheless detect an error on your


instrument, switch the instrument off and remove the
batteries. Inform your local GE Inspection Technologies
Service indicating the error and describing it.

Keep the shipping container for any repairs possibly


required which cannot be made on the spot.

9-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Manufacturer/Service addresses Appendix

France USA

GE Inspection Technologies Scs GE Inspection Technologies, LP


SAC Sans Souci 50 Industrial Park Road
68, Chemin des Ormeaux USA Lewistown, PA 17044
F 69760 Limonest
Phone +1 717 - 242 03 27
Phone +33 47 - 217 92 20 Fax +1 717 - 242 26 06
Fax +33 47 - 847 56 98

Great Britain

GE Inspection Technologies
892 Charter Avenue
Canley
GB Coventry CV4 8AF

Phone +44 845 - 130 - 3925


Fax +44 845 - 130 - 5775

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-9

Manufacturer/Service addresses Appendix

France USA

GE Inspection Technologies Scs GE Inspection Technologies, LP


SAC Sans Souci 50 Industrial Park Road
68, Chemin des Ormeaux USA Lewistown, PA 17044
F 69760 Limonest
Phone +1 717 - 242 03 27
Phone +33 47 - 217 92 20 Fax +1 717 - 242 26 06
Fax +33 47 - 847 56 98

Great Britain

GE Inspection Technologies
892 Charter Avenue
Canley
GB Coventry CV4 8AF

Phone +44 845 - 130 - 3925


Fax +44 845 - 130 - 5775

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-9


Appendix Spare parts list

9.4 Spare parts list 32 23 31

4
33

24

35
25

34

9-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix Spare parts list

9.4 Spare parts list 32 23 31

4
33

24

35
25

34

9-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Spare parts list Appendix

10

11

38
54
2

53

30
3 6

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-11

Spare parts list Appendix

10

11

38
54
2

53

30
3 6

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 9-11


Appendix Spare parts list

1
21

27
51

20
26

28 7

9
36

52 8

22
29

9-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Appendix Spare parts list

1
21

27
51

20
26

28 7

9
36

52 8

22
29

9-12 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Pos. # Description Id.-No. Remark Pos. # Description Id.-No. Remark
1 1 Housing upper part, with sealing 36163-3.130 1 1 Housing upper part, with sealing 36163-3.130
2 1 Housing lower part, partly mounted 36164-3.130 2 1 Housing lower part, partly mounted 36164-3.130
(contains Pos. 11, 6 and 30) (contains Pos. 11, 6 and 30)
3 1 Battery cover, complete 36165-3.190 3 1 Battery cover, complete 36165-3.190

Spare parts list


Spare parts list

4 1 Connector-Cover, complete 36166-3.110 4 1 Connector-Cover, complete 36166-3.110


5 1 Membrane keypad 35593-3.120 5 1 Membrane keypad 35593-3.120
6 2 Contact spring, complete 35632-3.160 6 2 Contact spring, complete 35632-3.160

Krautkramer USM 35X


Krautkramer USM 35X
7 1 Flexible cable LCD 35635-3.180 7 1 Flexible cable LCD 35635-3.180
8 1 Cable 5 pin Inverter 35451-3.180 8 1 Cable 5 pin Inverter 35451-3.180
9 1 Cable 2 pin LCD 35636-3.180 9 1 Cable 2 pin LCD 35636-3.180

10 1 PCB assembly USM 35 X 36160-3.220 10 1 PCB assembly USM 35 X 36160-3.220


- 1 PCB assembly USM 32 X B+F 36161-3.220 - 1 PCB assembly USM 32 X B+F 36161-3.220
- 1 PCB assembly USM 32 X L 36162-3.220 - 1 PCB assembly USM 32 X L 36162-3.220
11 1 PCB assembly USM 35 X Bat 36128-3.220 11 1 PCB assembly USM 35 X Bat 36128-3.220
12 2 Cable Lemo - MicroCoax 36070-3.180 12 2 Cable Lemo - MicroCoax 36070-3.180
- 2 BNC-Connector 06650-7.130 - 2 BNC-Connector 06650-7.130

20 4 Spacer (23 mm) 103138-6.020 20 4 Spacer (23 mm) 103138-6.020


21 2 Spacer (14 mm) 102043-6.020 21 2 Spacer (14 mm) 102043-6.020
22 2 Spacer (8 mm) 102044-6.020 22 2 Spacer (8 mm) 102044-6.020
23 2 Spacer sleeve 34809-6.020 23 2 Spacer sleeve 34809-6.020
24 2 Rotatable knob 36059-6.630 24 2 Rotatable knob 36059-6.630
25 1 Handle 35253-6.540 25 1 Handle 35253-6.540
26 1 Mounting bracket 35612-6.600 26 1 Mounting bracket 35612-6.600
27 1 Mounting bracket LCD 35621-6.600 27 1 Mounting bracket LCD 35621-6.600
28 1 Mounting bracket LCD inverter 35622-6.600 28 1 Mounting bracket LCD inverter 35622-6.600

Issue 01, 04/2005


Issue 01, 04/2005
29 1 Cover 35631-6.600 29 1 Cover 35631-6.600
30 2 Contact plate 35633-6.600 30 2 Contact plate 35633-6.600
31 2 Ratchet disk 34796-6.600 31 2 Ratchet disk 34796-6.600
32 2 Holder for handle 35301-6.640 32 2 Holder for handle 35301-6.640
- 16 Pressure devices 18672-7.820 - 16 Pressure devices 18672-7.820
33 1 Sealing (Key pad) 34994-6.640 33 1 Sealing (Key pad) 34994-6.640
34 2 Clamp, lower 34882-6.640 34 2 Clamp, lower 34882-6.640
35 2 Clamp, upper 35629-6.640 35 2 Clamp, upper 35629-6.640
36 1 Isolation foil 35634-6.650 36 1 Isolation foil 35634-6.650
37 2 Sealing screw 36071-6.070 37 2 Sealing screw 36071-6.070
38 2 Rotary position transducer 36056-6.530 38 2 Rotary position transducer 36056-6.530

50 2 Locking screw 12326-7.139 50 2 Locking screw 12326-7.139


51 1 LCD-Display 100874-7.232 51 1 LCD-Display 100874-7.232
52 1 Converter 101067-7.232 52 1 Converter 101067-7.232
53 4 Rubber foot 14520-7.820 53 4 Rubber foot 14520-7.820
54 2 Blanking cap , Lemo 103120-7.137 54 2 Blanking cap , Lemo 103120-7.137
- 2 Blanking cap , BNC 18906-7.139 - 2 Blanking cap , BNC 18906-7.139

Handle (Modification-Set complete) 35258-2.380 Handle (Modification-Set complete) 35258-2.380

08.March.05 / Ant 08.March.05 / Ant

9-13
9-13

Appendix
Appendix
9-14 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

9-14 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Changes 10

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 10-1

Changes 10

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 10-1


Changes

This chapter contains information about changes and


additions made at short notice and not yet included in
the operating manual.

If none exist, the chapter remains blank.

10-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Changes

This chapter contains information about changes and


additions made at short notice and not yet included in
the operating manual.

If none exist, the chapter remains blank.

10-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Index 11

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 11-1

Index 11

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 11-1


Index

A ANAMOD ................................................................ 5-57


ANGLE
a trig
Angle of incidence .............................................. 5-32
Triggering by an interface echo ........................... 5-15
Anticoincidence ...................................................... 5-15
A-Scan
Setting the A-scan .............................................. 5-48 aSTART .................................................................. 5-25
Starting point of gate A ....................................... 5-16
Accessories ............................................................. 2-5
aTHRSH
Additions ................................................................ 10-2
Threshold of gate A ............................................ 5-16
Addresses ................................................................ 9-8
aWIDTH
Adjustment range Width of gate A ................................................... 5-16
Function directory ................................................. 9-2
Adustment
Coarse and fine ..................................................... 4-9 B
aGAT (function group) ............................................. 5-14 Backlight ................................................................ 5-52
Alkaline batteries ...................................................... 7-4 BASE (function group) .............................................. 5-6
aLOGIC Basic settings ........................................................ 4-10
Evaluation logic gate A ....................................... 5-15
Batteries ................................................................... 1-2
Alphanumerical entries ........................................... 8-14 Care ...................................................................... 7-3
Charging the NiCd batteries .................................. 7-3
Analog output ................................................. 5-57, 8-5
BAUD-R .................................................................. 5-55

11-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Index

A ANAMOD ................................................................ 5-57


ANGLE
a trig
Angle of incidence .............................................. 5-32
Triggering by an interface echo ........................... 5-15
Anticoincidence ...................................................... 5-15
A-Scan
Setting the A-scan .............................................. 5-48 aSTART .................................................................. 5-25
Starting point of gate A ....................................... 5-16
Accessories ............................................................. 2-5
aTHRSH
Additions ................................................................ 10-2
Threshold of gate A ............................................ 5-16
Addresses ................................................................ 9-8
aWIDTH
Adjustment range Width of gate A ................................................... 5-16
Function directory ................................................. 9-2
Adustment
Coarse and fine ..................................................... 4-9 B
aGAT (function group) ............................................. 5-14 Backlight ................................................................ 5-52
Alkaline batteries ...................................................... 7-4 BASE (function group) .............................................. 5-6
aLOGIC Basic settings ........................................................ 4-10
Evaluation logic gate A ....................................... 5-15
Batteries ................................................................... 1-2
Alphanumerical entries ........................................... 8-14 Care ...................................................................... 7-3
Charging the NiCd batteries .................................. 7-3
Analog output ................................................. 5-57, 8-5
BAUD-R .................................................................. 5-55

11-2 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Index

bGAT (function group) ............................................. 5-14 Changes ................................................................. 10-1


bLOGIC Changing a function value ...................................... 8-14
Evaluation logic gate B ....................................... 5-15
Codes
BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve) ................. 5-70 Codes for function keys ...................................... 8-26
Function codes ................................................... 8-17
bSTART
Remote control ..................................................... 8-9
Starting point of gate B ....................................... 5-16
Coincidence ............................................................ 5-15
bTHRSH
Threshold of gate B ............................................ 5-16 Configuration .......................................................... 5-53
For test applications ........................................... 5-43
bWIDTH
Width of gate B ................................................... 5-16 Connecting a probe ................................................... 3-7
Controls .................................................................... 4-2
C COPYMOD ....................................................... 6-3, 8-9
Assignment of the COPY key ............................. 5-55
CAL
Semiautomatic calibration ......................... 5-19, 5-22
Calibration .............................................................. 5-17 D
Dual-element (TR) probes ................................... 5-21
D-DELAY (Display starting point) ............................. 5-7
Straight-beam probes .......................................... 5-18
With unknown materials ...................................... 5-19 DAC (function group) .............................................. 5-61
CFG1 (function group) ............................................ 5-53 DACECHO
Recording reference curve ........................ 5-63, 5-68
CFG2 (function group) ............................................ 5-53
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 11-3

Index

bGAT (function group) ............................................. 5-14 Changes ................................................................. 10-1


bLOGIC Changing a function value ...................................... 8-14
Evaluation logic gate B ....................................... 5-15
Codes
BOLDLI (Choice of a registration curve) ................. 5-70 Codes for function keys ...................................... 8-26
Function codes ................................................... 8-17
bSTART
Remote control ..................................................... 8-9
Starting point of gate B ....................................... 5-16
Coincidence ............................................................ 5-15
bTHRSH
Threshold of gate B ............................................ 5-16 Configuration .......................................................... 5-53
For test applications ........................................... 5-43
bWIDTH
Width of gate B ................................................... 5-16 Connecting a probe ................................................... 3-7
Controls .................................................................... 4-2
C COPYMOD ....................................................... 6-3, 8-9
Assignment of the COPY key ............................. 5-55
CAL
Semiautomatic calibration ......................... 5-19, 5-22
Calibration .............................................................. 5-17 D
Dual-element (TR) probes ................................... 5-21
D-DELAY (Display starting point) ............................. 5-7
Straight-beam probes .......................................... 5-18
With unknown materials ...................................... 5-19 DAC (function group) .............................................. 5-61
CFG1 (function group) ............................................ 5-53 DACECHO
Recording reference curve ........................ 5-63, 5-68
CFG2 (function group) ............................................ 5-53
Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 11-3
Index

DACMOD Deleting a reference echo ....................................... 5-27


Activating DAC according to JIS ........................ 5-67
Depth ...................................................................... 5-31
Activating DAC/TCG ........................................... 5-62
DGS evaluation (USM 35S) .................................... 5-71
DACMOD (Activating DAC) ................. 5-61, 5-66, 5-73
DIALOG
DAMPING (Probe matching) ..................................... 5-9
Selecting the language ....................................... 4-10
DATA (function group) ............................................. 5-38
DIALOG (Selecting the language) .......................... 5-53
Data exchange ......................................................... 8-8
DIR
Data saving ............................................................ 5-34 Directory of stored data sets .............................. 5-38
Data set DIR (Dataset directory) ........................................... 5-41
Deleting ............................................................... 5-35
Display ..................................................................... 4-3
Deleting all .......................................................... 5-36
Management ....................................................... 5-38 Display range ............................................................ 5-6
Recalling ............................................................. 5-36 Display starting point ................................................ 5-7
Storing ................................................................ 5-35
Distance-amplitude curve ....................................... 5-61
DATE according to JIS Z3060-2002 .............................. 5-66
Setting the gate .................................................. 5-56
Double assignment ................................................... 4-9
dBCORR (Sensitivity correction) .................. 5-64, 5-70
DUAL
DBSTEP ................................................................. 5-12 Pulser-receiver separation .................................. 5-10
Defects ..................................................................... 1-3

11-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Index

DACMOD Deleting a reference echo ....................................... 5-27


Activating DAC according to JIS ........................ 5-67
Depth ...................................................................... 5-31
Activating DAC/TCG ........................................... 5-62
DGS evaluation (USM 35S) .................................... 5-71
DACMOD (Activating DAC) ................. 5-61, 5-66, 5-73
DIALOG
DAMPING (Probe matching) ..................................... 5-9
Selecting the language ....................................... 4-10
DATA (function group) ............................................. 5-38
DIALOG (Selecting the language) .......................... 5-53
Data exchange ......................................................... 8-8
DIR
Data saving ............................................................ 5-34 Directory of stored data sets .............................. 5-38
Data set DIR (Dataset directory) ........................................... 5-41
Deleting ............................................................... 5-35
Display ..................................................................... 4-3
Deleting all .......................................................... 5-36
Management ....................................................... 5-38 Display range ............................................................ 5-6
Recalling ............................................................. 5-36 Display starting point ................................................ 5-7
Storing ................................................................ 5-35
Distance-amplitude curve ....................................... 5-61
DATE according to JIS Z3060-2002 .............................. 5-66
Setting the gate .................................................. 5-56
Double assignment ................................................... 4-9
dBCORR (Sensitivity correction) .................. 5-64, 5-70
DUAL
DBSTEP ................................................................. 5-12 Pulser-receiver separation .................................. 5-10
Defects ..................................................................... 1-3

11-4 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Index

E FREQU
Frequency range ................................................. 5-13
EC declaration .......................................................... 9-7
Frequency range ..................................................... 5-13
Echo display ........................................................... 5-51
Function directory ..................................................... 9-2
Enlarged echo display ......................................... 5-59
Zoom mode ........................................................... 4-3 Function groups ........................................ 4-4, 4-8, 5-3
Enlarged display Functions .................................................................. 4-4
Measurement value .............................................. 4-5 Function directory ................................................. 9-2
Overview ............................................................... 5-2
Errors ........................................................................ 1-3
Setting the functions ............................................. 4-9
Evaluation logic of the gates .................................. 5-15 Special keys ....................................................... 5-59
EVAMOD ................................................................ 5-58
G
F Gain .......................................................................... 5-5
FILLED Fine adjustment .................................................. 5-12
Echo display ....................................................... 5-51 Incrementation ...................................................... 5-5

FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain) ........................... 5-11 Gate setting ............................................................ 5-14

Flaw evaluation ......................................................... 1-6 Gates ...................................................................... 5-14


Starting point ...................................................... 5-16
Flaw position calculation ........................................ 5-31 Width .................................................................. 5-16
Freeze function ....................................................... 5-59

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 11-5

Index

E FREQU
Frequency range ................................................. 5-13
EC declaration .......................................................... 9-7
Frequency range ..................................................... 5-13
Echo display ........................................................... 5-51
Function directory ..................................................... 9-2
Enlarged echo display ......................................... 5-59
Zoom mode ........................................................... 4-3 Function groups ........................................ 4-4, 4-8, 5-3
Enlarged display Functions .................................................................. 4-4
Measurement value .............................................. 4-5 Function directory ................................................. 9-2
Overview ............................................................... 5-2
Errors ........................................................................ 1-3
Setting the functions ............................................. 4-9
Evaluation logic of the gates .................................. 5-15 Special keys ....................................................... 5-59
EVAMOD ................................................................ 5-58
G
F Gain .......................................................................... 5-5
FILLED Fine adjustment .................................................. 5-12
Echo display ....................................................... 5-51 Incrementation ...................................................... 5-5

FINE G (Fine adjustment of gain) ........................... 5-11 Gate setting ............................................................ 5-14

Flaw evaluation ......................................................... 1-6 Gates ...................................................................... 5-14


Starting point ...................................................... 5-16
Flaw position calculation ........................................ 5-31 Width .................................................................. 5-16
Freeze function ....................................................... 5-59

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 11-5


Index

H K
HORN Keys ......................................................................... 4-6
Acoustic alarm .................................................... 5-58 Special keys ....................................................... 5-59

I L
Instrument Language ................................................................ 4-10
Care of the instrument .......................................... 7-2
LCD
Instrument versions .................................................. 1-8 Color scheme ...................................................... 4-14
Intefaces LCD (function group) ............................................... 5-50
RS 232 interface ................................................... 8-6
Lemo socket ............................................................. 8-5
Interface echo ........................................................ 5-15
LIGHT
Interfaces LCD backlight ..................................................... 5-52
I/O interface .......................................................... 8-4
Limits ........................................................................ 1-5
Line ........................................................................... 4-5
J
JDAC (function group) ............................................ 5-66 M
MAGNIFY
Gate spreading ................................................... 5-48

11-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Index

H K
HORN Keys ......................................................................... 4-6
Acoustic alarm .................................................... 5-58 Special keys ....................................................... 5-59

I L
Instrument Language ................................................................ 4-10
Care of the instrument .......................................... 7-2
LCD
Instrument versions .................................................. 1-8 Color scheme ...................................................... 4-14
Intefaces LCD (function group) ............................................... 5-50
RS 232 interface ................................................... 8-6
Lemo socket ............................................................. 8-5
Interface echo ........................................................ 5-15
LIGHT
Interfaces LCD backlight ..................................................... 5-52
I/O interface .......................................................... 8-4
Limits ........................................................................ 1-5
Line ........................................................................... 4-5
J
JDAC (function group) ............................................ 5-66 M
MAGNIFY
Gate spreading ................................................... 5-48

11-6 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Index

Maintenance ............................................................. 7-5 Operator training ....................................................... 1-4


Manufacturer ............................................................ 9-8 Operator's controls ................................................... 4-2
MEAS-P1 to P4 ........................................................ 4-5
Measurement line ........................................... 4-5, 5-46 P
Configuration ....................................................... 5-49
P-DELAY (Probe delay) ............................................ 5-8
Measuring ............................................................... 5-23
Power supply ............................................................ 3-2
Measuring point ...................................................... 5-17
PREVIEW
MEM (function group) ............................................. 5-34 Dataset preview .................................................. 5-38
MSEL (function group) ............................................ 5-49 PRF-MOD
MTLVEL (Sound velocity) ......................................... 5-7 Pulse repetition frequency .................................. 5-11
Multiple DAC ................................................. 5-65, 5-70 PRINTER
Selecting the printer driver .................................. 5-55
Printer
O Preparing .............................................................. 6-2
OFFSET PRINTER (Printer for test report) ........................... 5-51
Distance of multiple DAC .......................... 5-65, 5-70
Printer connection .................................................... 8-8
OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ............ 5-65, 5-70
Printing ..................................................................... 8-9
Operating levels
Printing data ............................................................. 6-2
Overview ............................................................... 5-2

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 11-7

Index

Maintenance ............................................................. 7-5 Operator training ....................................................... 1-4


Manufacturer ............................................................ 9-8 Operator's controls ................................................... 4-2
MEAS-P1 to P4 ........................................................ 4-5
Measurement line ........................................... 4-5, 5-46 P
Configuration ....................................................... 5-49
P-DELAY (Probe delay) ............................................ 5-8
Measuring ............................................................... 5-23
Power supply ............................................................ 3-2
Measuring point ...................................................... 5-17
PREVIEW
MEM (function group) ............................................. 5-34 Dataset preview .................................................. 5-38
MSEL (function group) ............................................ 5-49 PRF-MOD
MTLVEL (Sound velocity) ......................................... 5-7 Pulse repetition frequency .................................. 5-11
Multiple DAC ................................................. 5-65, 5-70 PRINTER
Selecting the printer driver .................................. 5-55
Printer
O Preparing .............................................................. 6-2
OFFSET PRINTER (Printer for test report) ........................... 5-51
Distance of multiple DAC .......................... 5-65, 5-70
Printer connection .................................................... 8-8
OFFSET (Distance of multiple DAC) ............ 5-65, 5-70
Printing ..................................................................... 8-9
Operating levels
Printing data ............................................................. 6-2
Overview ............................................................... 5-2

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 11-7


Index

Probe connection ...................................................... 3-7 Recycling .................................................................. 7-6


Probe delay .............................................................. 5-8 Reduced projection distance .................................. 5-31
Probe matching ........................................................ 5-9 REFECHO .............................................................. 5-25
Projection distance ................................................. 5-31 REFMOD ................................................................ 5-25
PULS (function group) .............................................. 5-9 Registration curve .................................................. 5-70
Pulse repetition frequency ...................................... 5-11 REJECT ................................................................. 5-12
Pulser adjustment .................................................... 5-9 Remote control ......................................................... 8-9
Pulser-receiver separation ...................................... 5-10 Reset ........................................................................ 3-8
Rotary knobs ............................................................ 4-6
R
RANGE (Display range) ............................................ 5-6 S
Recalling a data set ................................................ 5-36 S-DISP ..................................................................... 4-5
Receiver adjustment ............................................... 5-11 S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading) ...................... 5-46
RECORD (Recording reference curve) ......... 5-62, 5-67 Safety information .................................................... 1-2
RECTIFY ................................................................ 5-13 SCALE ................................................................... 5-52
RECTIFY (Rectification) ......................................... 5-13 Screen ...................................................................... 4-3
RECV (function group) ............................................ 5-11 Semiautomatic calibration ............................ 5-19, 5-22

11-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Index

Probe connection ...................................................... 3-7 Recycling .................................................................. 7-6


Probe delay .............................................................. 5-8 Reduced projection distance .................................. 5-31
Probe matching ........................................................ 5-9 REFECHO .............................................................. 5-25
Projection distance ................................................. 5-31 REFMOD ................................................................ 5-25
PULS (function group) .............................................. 5-9 Registration curve .................................................. 5-70
Pulse repetition frequency ...................................... 5-11 REJECT ................................................................. 5-12
Pulser adjustment .................................................... 5-9 Remote control ......................................................... 8-9
Pulser-receiver separation ...................................... 5-10 Reset ........................................................................ 3-8
Rotary knobs ............................................................ 4-6
R
RANGE (Display range) ............................................ 5-6 S
Recalling a data set ................................................ 5-36 S-DISP ..................................................................... 4-5
Receiver adjustment ............................................... 5-11 S-DISP (Zoomed display of reading) ...................... 5-46
RECORD (Recording reference curve) ......... 5-62, 5-67 Safety information .................................................... 1-2
RECTIFY ................................................................ 5-13 SCALE ................................................................... 5-52
RECTIFY (Rectification) ......................................... 5-13 Screen ...................................................................... 4-3
RECV (function group) ............................................ 5-11 Semiautomatic calibration ............................ 5-19, 5-22

11-8 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Index

Sensitivity correction .................................... 5-64, 5-70 In this manual ..................................................... 1-11


LED ..................................................................... 5-60
Serial communication activation ............................... 8-8
Status symbols ................................................... 5-60
Service ..................................................................... 9-8
Syntax .................................................................... 8-11
SETTING
Function list ........................................................ 5-42
setting T
Function list ........................................................ 5-38 T-CORR
Setting of gain .......................................................... 4-8 Sensitivity correction (DAC) ................................ 5-64
Sensitivity correction (JDAC) .............................. 5-70
Sound attenuation (DGS) ........................................ 5-78
Transfer correction (DGS) ................................... 5-78
Sound velocity .......................................................... 5-7
TCG ........................................................................ 5-62
Spare parts list ....................................................... 9-10 Registration curve ............................................... 5-70
Standard package .................................................... 2-3 Temperature .............................................................. 1-6
Start-up .................................................................... 3-8 Test report ................................................................ 6-3
Storing a data set ................................................... 5-35 Test requirements ..................................................... 1-4
Sub-D socket ............................................................ 8-6 TESTINF
Additional information for stored data sets ......... 5-38
SVEL1 (Fixed sound velocity) ................................ 5-47
THICKNE
Switching on/off ........................................................ 3-8
Material thickness ............................................... 5-32
Symbols

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 11-9

Index

Sensitivity correction .................................... 5-64, 5-70 In this manual ..................................................... 1-11


LED ..................................................................... 5-60
Serial communication activation ............................... 8-8
Status symbols ................................................... 5-60
Service ..................................................................... 9-8
Syntax .................................................................... 8-11
SETTING
Function list ........................................................ 5-42
setting T
Function list ........................................................ 5-38 T-CORR
Setting of gain .......................................................... 4-8 Sensitivity correction (DAC) ................................ 5-64
Sensitivity correction (JDAC) .............................. 5-70
Sound attenuation (DGS) ........................................ 5-78
Transfer correction (DGS) ................................... 5-78
Sound velocity .......................................................... 5-7
TCG ........................................................................ 5-62
Spare parts list ....................................................... 9-10 Registration curve ............................................... 5-70
Standard package .................................................... 2-3 Temperature .............................................................. 1-6
Start-up .................................................................... 3-8 Test report ................................................................ 6-3
Storing a data set ................................................... 5-35 Test requirements ..................................................... 1-4
Sub-D socket ............................................................ 8-6 TESTINF
Additional information for stored data sets ......... 5-38
SVEL1 (Fixed sound velocity) ................................ 5-47
THICKNE
Switching on/off ........................................................ 3-8
Material thickness ............................................... 5-32
Symbols

Krautkramer USM 35X Issue 01, 04/2005 11-9


Index

Threshold of the gates ............................................ 5-16 W


TIME
Wall thickness .......................................................... 1-6
Setting the time .................................................. 5-56
Waste disposal ......................................................... 7-6
TOF
Selecting the measuring point ............................. 5-44 Width of the gates .................................................. 5-16
Transfer correction (DGS) ....................................... 5-78
Transfer of datasets ................................................ 8-15 X
Transmission timing ................................................ 8-12 X-position ............................................................... 5-40
TRIG (function group) ............................................. 5-31 X-VALUE
Of the probe ........................................................ 5-32

U
Ultrasonic testing ...................................................... 1-3
Z
UNIT Zoom mode .............................................................. 4-3
Units of measurement ......................................... 5-54
Units ....................................................................... 4-11

11-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X

Index

Threshold of the gates ............................................ 5-16 W


TIME
Wall thickness .......................................................... 1-6
Setting the time .................................................. 5-56
Waste disposal ......................................................... 7-6
TOF
Selecting the measuring point ............................. 5-44 Width of the gates .................................................. 5-16
Transfer correction (DGS) ....................................... 5-78
Transfer of datasets ................................................ 8-15 X
Transmission timing ................................................ 8-12 X-position ............................................................... 5-40
TRIG (function group) ............................................. 5-31 X-VALUE
Of the probe ........................................................ 5-32

U
Ultrasonic testing ...................................................... 1-3
Z
UNIT Zoom mode .............................................................. 4-3
Units of measurement ......................................... 5-54
Units ....................................................................... 4-11

11-10 Issue 01, 04/2005 Krautkramer USM 35X


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1

USM 35X
USM 35X DAC
USM 35X S

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D - 1

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1

USM 35X
USM 35X DAC
USM 35X S

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D - 1


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment

- - - Spike pulse
Spectrum Picture: 1
Spectrum Picture: 2
Spectrum Picture: 3
Spectrum Picture: 4
Damping - - DUAL = off
342 DAMPING = low
45 DAMPING = high
DUAL = on
1000 DAMPING = low
50 DAMPING = high
Capacity pF - 220 - POWER = low
1000 POWER = high
Pulse Repetition Frequency Hz 20% 4-1000 20%
PRF Mode - - - Manual,
automatically linked
to range in 10 steps
PRF step Hz - 4 - >1,5m
100 <1,5m
Operating Modes - - - Single-,
dual mode
through
Characteristics of Transmitter Pulse - - -
Pulse voltage V -346 -315 -283 1000 Hz
DAMPING = low
POWER = high

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-2 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment

- - - Spike pulse
Spectrum Picture: 1
Spectrum Picture: 2
Spectrum Picture: 3
Spectrum Picture: 4
Damping - - DUAL = off
342 DAMPING = low
45 DAMPING = high
DUAL = on
1000 DAMPING = low
50 DAMPING = high
Capacity pF - 220 - POWER = low
1000 POWER = high
Pulse Repetition Frequency Hz 20% 4-1000 20%
PRF Mode - - - Manual,
automatically linked
to range in 10 steps
PRF step Hz - 4 - >1,5m
100 <1,5m
Operating Modes - - - Single-,
dual mode
through
Characteristics of Transmitter Pulse - - -
Pulse voltage V -346 -315 -283 1000 Hz
DAMPING = low
POWER = high

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-2 GE Inspection Technologies


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Pulse rise time ns 8,19 9,64 11,08
Pulse duration ns 120,4 133,7 147,1
Effective output impedance 23 29 35
Pulse voltage V -238 -216 -195 1000 Hz
DAMPING = high
POWER = high
Pulse rise time ns 11,18 13,15 15,12
Pulse duration ns 81,4 90,5 99,5
Effective output impedance 21 26 31
Pulse voltage V -246 -224 -202 1000 Hz
DAMPING = low
POWER = low
Pulse rise time ns 5,33 6,27 7,21
Pulse duration ns 34,3 38,1 41,9
Effective output impedance 38 48 58
Pulse voltage V -153 -139 -125 1000 Hz
DAMPING = high
POWER = low
Pulse rise time ns 6,21 7,31 8,40
Pulse duration ns 25,1 27,9 30,7
Effective output impedance 24 30 36

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-3

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Pulse rise time ns 8,19 9,64 11,08
Pulse duration ns 120,4 133,7 147,1
Effective output impedance 23 29 35
Pulse voltage V -238 -216 -195 1000 Hz
DAMPING = high
POWER = high
Pulse rise time ns 11,18 13,15 15,12
Pulse duration ns 81,4 90,5 99,5
Effective output impedance 21 26 31
Pulse voltage V -246 -224 -202 1000 Hz
DAMPING = low
POWER = low
Pulse rise time ns 5,33 6,27 7,21
Pulse duration ns 34,3 38,1 41,9
Effective output impedance 38 48 58
Pulse voltage V -153 -139 -125 1000 Hz
DAMPING = high
POWER = low
Pulse rise time ns 6,21 7,31 8,40
Pulse duration ns 25,1 27,9 30,7
Effective output impedance 24 30 36

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-3


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Receiver
Amplifier - - -
Setting Range dB - 110 -
Increments dB - 0,5 -
1
2
6
12
Attenuator uncal. range dB - 4 -
Accuracy of calibrated attenuator dB -2 0 2
Uncalibrated increments dB - ~0,1 -
Amplifier Frequency - - -
Frequency spectrum (-3dB) MHz - 0,2 - 20 - (-3dB)
Frequency ranges MHz - - - 0,2 - 1 MHz Filter 4
Lower frequency range MHz 0,177 0,197 0,216
Upper frequency range MHz 1,138 1,265 1,391
Center frequency MHz 0,473 0,498 0,523
Bandwidth MHz 0,962 1,069 1,175
Maximum frequency MHz 0,394 0,526 0,657
Dynamic range dB - >110 -
Noise level nV 1 - 80
Gain for 80% SH dB 24,0 25,0 26,0
Minimum input voltage V 60 90 120

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-4 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Receiver
Amplifier - - -
Setting Range dB - 110 -
Increments dB - 0,5 -
1
2
6
12
Attenuator uncal. range dB - 4 -
Accuracy of calibrated attenuator dB -2 0 2
Uncalibrated increments dB - ~0,1 -
Amplifier Frequency - - -
Frequency spectrum (-3dB) MHz - 0,2 - 20 - (-3dB)
Frequency ranges MHz - - - 0,2 - 1 MHz Filter 4
Lower frequency range MHz 0,177 0,197 0,216
Upper frequency range MHz 1,138 1,265 1,391
Center frequency MHz 0,473 0,498 0,523
Bandwidth MHz 0,962 1,069 1,175
Maximum frequency MHz 0,394 0,526 0,657
Dynamic range dB - >110 -
Noise level nV 1 - 80
Gain for 80% SH dB 24,0 25,0 26,0
Minimum input voltage V 60 90 120

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-4 GE Inspection Technologies


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Maximum input voltage V - - 40
Frequency ranges MHz - - - 0,5 - 4 MHz Filter 1
Lower frequency range MHz 0,352 0,391 0,430
Upper frequency range MHz 3,903 4,337 4,770
Center frequency MHz 1,237 1,302 1,367
Bandwidth MHz 3,551 3,946 4,340
Maximum frequency MHz 1,055 1,407 1,759
Gain for 80% SH dB 23,5 24,5 25,5
Minimum input voltage V 90 110 120
Maximum input voltage V - - 40
Dynamic range dB - >110 -
Noise level nV 1 - 80
Frequency ranges MHz - - - 0,8 - 8 MHz Filter 3
Lower frequency range MHz 0,676 0,752 0,827
Upper frequency range MHz 9,843 10,937 12,030
Center frequency MHz 2,723 2,867 3,010
Bandwidth MHz 9,167 10,186 11,204
Maximum frequency MHz 2,041 2,722 3,402
Gain for 80% SH dB 24,0 25,0 26,0
Minimum input voltage V 130 165 200
Maximum input voltage V - - 40
Dynamic range dB - >105 -

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-5

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Maximum input voltage V - - 40
Frequency ranges MHz - - - 0,5 - 4 MHz Filter 1
Lower frequency range MHz 0,352 0,391 0,430
Upper frequency range MHz 3,903 4,337 4,770
Center frequency MHz 1,237 1,302 1,367
Bandwidth MHz 3,551 3,946 4,340
Maximum frequency MHz 1,055 1,407 1,759
Gain for 80% SH dB 23,5 24,5 25,5
Minimum input voltage V 90 110 120
Maximum input voltage V - - 40
Dynamic range dB - >110 -
Noise level nV 1 - 80
Frequency ranges MHz - - - 0,8 - 8 MHz Filter 3
Lower frequency range MHz 0,676 0,752 0,827
Upper frequency range MHz 9,843 10,937 12,030
Center frequency MHz 2,723 2,867 3,010
Bandwidth MHz 9,167 10,186 11,204
Maximum frequency MHz 2,041 2,722 3,402
Gain for 80% SH dB 24,0 25,0 26,0
Minimum input voltage V 130 165 200
Maximum input voltage V - - 40
Dynamic range dB - >105 -

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-5


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Noise level nV 1 - 80
Frequency ranges MHz - - - 2 - 20 MHz Filter 2
Lower frequency range MHz 1,875 2,083 2,291
Upper frequency range MHz 18,528 20,587 22,645
Center frequency MHz 6,220 6,548 6,875
Bandwidth MHz 16,653 18,504 20,354
Maximum frequency MHz 9,072 12,096 15,120
Gain for 80% SH dB 24,5 25,5 26,5
Minimum input voltage V 200 260 320
Maximum input voltage V - - 40
Dynamic range dB - >100 -
Noise level nV 1 - 80
Deadtime after transmitter pulse s - <5 us - 1nF,125 Ohm,0,5-4MHz
Receiver input impedance
Single probe (combined transmitter and receiver) Single mode
Rmax - 338 - Rmax
Rmin - 338 - Rmin
Cmax pf - 52 - Cmax
Cmin pf - 52 - Cmin
Dual-probe (separate transmitter and receiver) Dual mode
- 511 -
- 511 -

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-6 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Noise level nV 1 - 80
Frequency ranges MHz - - - 2 - 20 MHz Filter 2
Lower frequency range MHz 1,875 2,083 2,291
Upper frequency range MHz 18,528 20,587 22,645
Center frequency MHz 6,220 6,548 6,875
Bandwidth MHz 16,653 18,504 20,354
Maximum frequency MHz 9,072 12,096 15,120
Gain for 80% SH dB 24,5 25,5 26,5
Minimum input voltage V 200 260 320
Maximum input voltage V - - 40
Dynamic range dB - >100 -
Noise level nV 1 - 80
Deadtime after transmitter pulse s - <5 us - 1nF,125 Ohm,0,5-4MHz
Receiver input impedance
Single probe (combined transmitter and receiver) Single mode
Rmax - 338 - Rmax
Rmin - 338 - Rmin
Cmax pf - 52 - Cmax
Cmin pf - 52 - Cmin
Dual-probe (separate transmitter and receiver) Dual mode
- 511 -
- 511 -

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-6 GE Inspection Technologies


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
pf - 33 -
pf - 33 -
Signal Mode - - -
Full Wave - yes
Negative Halfwave - yes -
Positive Halfwave - yes -
RF yes To 50 mm steel
Suppression - yes -
Adjustable % - 1 - 80 -

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-7

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
pf - 33 -
pf - 33 -
Signal Mode - - -
Full Wave - yes
Negative Halfwave - yes -
Positive Halfwave - yes -
RF yes To 50 mm steel
Suppression - yes -
Adjustable % - 1 - 80 -

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-7


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Monitor
Number of Gates - 2 -
Alarm logic - off, -
pos,
neg,
trigger for gate B (C)
Start mm - 0 -
to
9999
Width mm - 0,2 -
to
9999
Threshold % - 10 - 90 -
Measurement points - flank, -
peak
jflank JIS Z3060
Magnifier - yes - Display of A-scan
on full screen width
Alarm - LED, - Horn
horn switchable
Interface echo start - yes - Control of
Gate B by Gate A
Switch output - yes - See interfaces

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-8 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Monitor
Number of Gates - 2 -
Alarm logic - off, -
pos,
neg,
trigger for gate B (C)
Start mm - 0 -
to
9999
Width mm - 0,2 -
to
9999
Threshold % - 10 - 90 -
Measurement points - flank, -
peak
jflank JIS Z3060
Magnifier - yes - Display of A-scan
on full screen width
Alarm - LED, - Horn
horn switchable
Interface echo start - yes - Control of
Gate B by Gate A
Switch output - yes - See interfaces

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-8 GE Inspection Technologies


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Display
Type - active -
color-LCD
Dimensions of the Display mm - 86 x 115 - (HxW)
Resolution - 240 x 320- Number of pixels
Backlight - yes - 2 steps
A-scan display
Linearity of time base % -0,5 0,5
Sampling error % -2 0 2 bei 2 MHz
Display jitter - - -
Amplitude % -2 0 2 Amplitude
Position % -1 0 1 Position
Measurement resolution - - -
Sound path mm 0,01 - 1 0,01:
0 to 99 mm
0,1:
100 mm to 999 mm
1:
ab 1000 mm
Amplitude % - 0,5 -
,
ns - 100 -
ns - 250 - Following an
interface echo

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-9

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Display
Type - active -
color-LCD
Dimensions of the Display mm - 86 x 115 - (HxW)
Resolution - 240 x 320- Number of pixels
Backlight - yes - 2 steps
A-scan display
Linearity of time base % -0,5 0,5
Sampling error % -2 0 2 bei 2 MHz
Display jitter - - -
Amplitude % -2 0 2 Amplitude
Position % -1 0 1 Position
Measurement resolution - - -
Sound path mm 0,01 - 1 0,01:
0 to 99 mm
0,1:
100 mm to 999 mm
1:
ab 1000 mm
Amplitude % - 0,5 -
,
ns - 100 -
ns - 250 - Following an
interface echo

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-9


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Display width mm - 0,5 -
to
9999
Fixed ranges mm - 55 -
Display start mm - -10 - Display start
to
900
Probe delay s - 0 -
to
199,99
Automatic Calibration - yes - 2 step
calibration
Material velocity m/s - 1000 - Resulation 1m/s
to
15000
Unit of measurement - mm, -
inch
Linearity of time base % 0,5 0 0,5
Trigonometry - - -
Angle of incidence - 0 - 90 - Resulation 0,1
Increments - 0,1 - Increments
X-value mm - 0 - 100 - Distance:
index point to
probe front edge
Object thickness mm - 1 - 9999 - To calculate
Sound Reflection

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-10 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Display width mm - 0,5 -
to
9999
Fixed ranges mm - 55 -
Display start mm - -10 - Display start
to
900
Probe delay s - 0 -
to
199,99
Automatic Calibration - yes - 2 step
calibration
Material velocity m/s - 1000 - Resulation 1m/s
to
15000
Unit of measurement - mm, -
inch
Linearity of time base % 0,5 0 0,5
Trigonometry - - -
Angle of incidence - 0 - 90 - Resulation 0,1
Increments - 0,1 - Increments
X-value mm - 0 - 100 - Distance:
index point to
probe front edge
Object thickness mm - 1 - 9999 - To calculate
Sound Reflection

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-10 GE Inspection Technologies


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Diameter mm/inch 10 - 2000 flat mm
0,40 - 800 flat inch
Image processing - - -
Readings to be displayed - 5 -
Time of flight - yes - For Gate A, B
Sound path difference - B-A - For Gate A, B
Surface distance - yes - For Gate A, B
Red. surface distance - yes - For Gate A, B
Depth position - yes - For Gate A, B
Amplitude in % - yes - For Gate A, B
Amplitude in dB - yes -- to gate threshold
to reference (REF)
for USM 35X DAC/S
to reference curve
Amplitude in % curve - yes - * Only USM 35X DAC
and S
for gate A,B
to reference curve
Amplitude as ERS - yes - * Only USM 35X S
for gate A
Alarm - yes - For Gate A,B
Evaluation curve (DGS) - yes - * only for USM 35X S
Test sensitivity - yes - * only for USM 35X S

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-11

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Diameter mm/inch 10 - 2000 flat mm
0,40 - 800 flat inch
Image processing - - -
Readings to be displayed - 5 -
Time of flight - yes - For Gate A, B
Sound path difference - B-A - For Gate A, B
Surface distance - yes - For Gate A, B
Red. surface distance - yes - For Gate A, B
Depth position - yes - For Gate A, B
Amplitude in % - yes - For Gate A, B
Amplitude in dB - yes -- to gate threshold
to reference (REF)
for USM 35X DAC/S
to reference curve
Amplitude in % curve - yes - * Only USM 35X DAC
and S
for gate A,B
to reference curve
Amplitude as ERS - yes - * Only USM 35X S
for gate A
Alarm - yes - For Gate A,B
Evaluation curve (DGS) - yes - * only for USM 35X S
Test sensitivity - yes - * only for USM 35X S

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-11


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Number of legs yes addional possible
change of A-scan
color according to
skips
Flaw class yes Flaw class
db-difference to reference yes for DAC
Reference gain Gr yes for DGS
Signal display mode - standard,-
filled
Signal processing - - -
Screen freeze - yes - Freeze
Auto freeze - yes - Auto freeze
A-scan Compare - yes -
Echo dynamic - yes - Echo envelope
Peak Freeze - yes - For Gate B
Zoom - yes - A-scan on full
screen width
Status information - yes -
Dialog languages - 20 -
Function lock - yes - In zoom mode

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-12 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Number of legs yes addional possible
change of A-scan
color according to
skips
Flaw class yes Flaw class
db-difference to reference yes for DAC
Reference gain Gr yes for DGS
Signal display mode - standard,-
filled
Signal processing - - -
Screen freeze - yes - Freeze
Auto freeze - yes - Auto freeze
A-scan Compare - yes -
Echo dynamic - yes - Echo envelope
Peak Freeze - yes - For Gate B
Zoom - yes - A-scan on full
screen width
Status information - yes -
Dialog languages - 20 -
Function lock - yes - In zoom mode

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-12 GE Inspection Technologies


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Amplitude evaluation
DAC yes - * Only USM 35X DAC
and S
Distance amplitude curve
Number of reference echoes - 10 - Reference echoes
Dynamic range dB - 40 - For TCG
Slope maximum dB/s 6 - For TCG
DGS - yes - * Only USM 35X S
Number of probes - 24 - In memory
Free programmable probe - yes - One probe per data set
Reference reflectors - SDH -
BE
FBH
Attenuation correction - yes -
Transfer correction - yes -
Quadrant correction - yes -
DAC Mode - yes - * Only USM 35X DAC
and S
display of curve
Curve - yes - Evaluation curve
TCG - yes - Depth compensation
Additional curves - 4 -
Curve offset dB - 0,1 - 14 - Additional curves
JIS-DAC yes

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-13

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Amplitude evaluation
DAC yes - * Only USM 35X DAC
and S
Distance amplitude curve
Number of reference echoes - 10 - Reference echoes
Dynamic range dB - 40 - For TCG
Slope maximum dB/s 6 - For TCG
DGS - yes - * Only USM 35X S
Number of probes - 24 - In memory
Free programmable probe - yes - One probe per data set
Reference reflectors - SDH -
BE
FBH
Attenuation correction - yes -
Transfer correction - yes -
Quadrant correction - yes -
DAC Mode - yes - * Only USM 35X DAC
and S
display of curve
Curve - yes - Evaluation curve
TCG - yes - Depth compensation
Additional curves - 4 -
Curve offset dB - 0,1 - 14 - Additional curves
JIS-DAC yes

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-13


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Data processing
Analog-to-Digital Conversion - - -
Sample frequency MHz 30 - 240
Storage of data - yes - From internal memory
Number of datasets - 800 -
Contents of datasets - - - A-scan + instrument
setup
Dataset description - - - Numerical and alpha-
numerical
String Length (Dataset name) - 24 -
Notes, No. of fields - 9 - 6 alphanumerical +
3 numerical
Memo, No. of characters - 24 -
Date and time - yes -
Measurement results
Sound path (TOF) - yes - For Gate A and B
Trigiometric values - selectable-
Amplidute - selectable-
Hardcopy - yes - Format PCX
Function list - yes -
Test Report - yes -

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-14 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Data processing
Analog-to-Digital Conversion - - -
Sample frequency MHz 30 - 240
Storage of data - yes - From internal memory
Number of datasets - 800 -
Contents of datasets - - - A-scan + instrument
setup
Dataset description - - - Numerical and alpha-
numerical
String Length (Dataset name) - 24 -
Notes, No. of fields - 9 - 6 alphanumerical +
3 numerical
Memo, No. of characters - 24 -
Date and time - yes -
Measurement results
Sound path (TOF) - yes - For Gate A and B
Trigiometric values - selectable-
Amplidute - selectable-
Hardcopy - yes - Format PCX
Function list - yes -
Test Report - yes -

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-14 GE Inspection Technologies


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Interfaces
Outputs - - -
Alarms - TTL -
Horn - yes -
Alarm gate A/B - yes - Logical OR
Switching voltage U V= - 3 - HCT level with 100 Ohm
serial
Max. switching current I mA 6 - Max. switching current
Hysteresis % 0,5 0 0,5 Hysteresis
Accuracy of the threshold % 2 - 2 Correspondig to actual
threshold
Hold time t ms 20% 500 20% Hold time
Analog output
Amplitude Gate A or B U V= - 0-5 - Corresponding to
100% SH
Time of flight Gate A or B U V= - 0-5 - Corresponding to
gate width
Max. switch current mA - 0,5 - Max. switch current
Output impedance - 100 - Output impedance
Linearity % 0,5 0 0,5 8 Bit +/- 1/2 LSB
Rise time V/s - 2,5 - Rise time
Fall time V/s - 2,5 - Fall time
Hold time ms - 8 - 250 - Depending on PRF
Digital input

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-15

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Interfaces
Outputs - - -
Alarms - TTL -
Horn - yes -
Alarm gate A/B - yes - Logical OR
Switching voltage U V= - 3 - HCT level with 100 Ohm
serial
Max. switching current I mA 6 - Max. switching current
Hysteresis % 0,5 0 0,5 Hysteresis
Accuracy of the threshold % 2 - 2 Correspondig to actual
threshold
Hold time t ms 20% 500 20% Hold time
Analog output
Amplitude Gate A or B U V= - 0-5 - Corresponding to
100% SH
Time of flight Gate A or B U V= - 0-5 - Corresponding to
gate width
Max. switch current mA - 0,5 - Max. switch current
Output impedance - 100 - Output impedance
Linearity % 0,5 0 0,5 8 Bit +/- 1/2 LSB
Rise time V/s - 2,5 - Rise time
Fall time V/s - 2,5 - Fall time
Hold time ms - 8 - 250 - Depending on PRF
Digital input

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-15


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Control
Test data release - yes - TTL
Digital interface
Types
RS-232 - yes - RS-232
Printer
Output/type - - - RS 232
Driver - - - Epson
HP
Seiko
HP DeskJet 1200
HP LaserJet 1200
Data Redable about
RS232
Time of flight - yes - Time of flight
Amplitude - yes - Amplitude
Alarms - yes - Alarms
A-Scan yes A-Scan
Trigger - TTL -
Remote control - - - RS 232
VGA output yes
Horizontal frequency kHz 31,3
Vertical frequency Hz 85

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-16 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Control
Test data release - yes - TTL
Digital interface
Types
RS-232 - yes - RS-232
Printer
Output/type - - - RS 232
Driver - - - Epson
HP
Seiko
HP DeskJet 1200
HP LaserJet 1200
Data Redable about
RS232
Time of flight - yes - Time of flight
Amplitude - yes - Amplitude
Alarms - yes - Alarms
A-Scan yes A-Scan
Trigger - TTL -
Remote control - - - RS 232
VGA output yes
Horizontal frequency kHz 31,3
Vertical frequency Hz 85

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-16 GE Inspection Technologies


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
General
Instrument - - -
Size (HxWxD) mm - 176 x 255- x 105
Weight kg - 2,2 - incl. Batteries
Storage temperature C -20 +60
Temperate range for mains operation C 0 40
Temperature range for battery operation C 0 60
Warm-up period h - - - 10 minutes at 25 C
Possible power supplies - - - Battery, mains
(external power supply)
Voltage range for battery operation V= 8,6 13 Li Ionen Battery
5,4 8 6 NiCD, NiMH
Cells
Voltage range with power supply V= 9,5 13
Power consumption VA 5,5 - 8 Min (ECO)
Max (FULL)
Low battery warning - yes - Status display
Environmental Protection - IP 66 --
Shock resistivity - - - Shock resistance
according to DIN
IEC 68, 6 ms, 60g
shocks per axis
Vibration Vibration resistance
according to DIN IEC 68,
1-150 Hz, 2g, 20 cycles
per axis

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-17

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
General
Instrument - - -
Size (HxWxD) mm - 176 x 255- x 105
Weight kg - 2,2 - incl. Batteries
Storage temperature C -20 +60
Temperate range for mains operation C 0 40
Temperature range for battery operation C 0 60
Warm-up period h - - - 10 minutes at 25 C
Possible power supplies - - - Battery, mains
(external power supply)
Voltage range for battery operation V= 8,6 13 Li Ionen Battery
5,4 8 6 NiCD, NiMH
Cells
Voltage range with power supply V= 9,5 13
Power consumption VA 5,5 - 8 Min (ECO)
Max (FULL)
Low battery warning - yes - Status display
Environmental Protection - IP 66 --
Shock resistivity - - - Shock resistance
according to DIN
IEC 68, 6 ms, 60g
shocks per axis
Vibration Vibration resistance
according to DIN IEC 68,
1-150 Hz, 2g, 20 cycles
per axis

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-17


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Stability against temperature change - - -
Amplitude %/10 C -5 0 5
Echo position %/10 C -1 0 1
Stability against voltage change - - -
Amplitude % -2 0 2
Time of flight % -1 0 1
Power supply - - - Li Ion Battery
6 NiMH cells
Battery operation time h - 14 - Li Ion Battery
3 6 NiMH cells
Stability after warm-up time - - - After 30 minutes
Low battery display - - - Statussymbol
Amplitude %/10 C -2 0 2 +/-0,5%
Time of flight % -1 0 1 +/- 0,5mm
Change in amplitude over time base position % - - -
with battery c
Types of Sockets
Probe connection - Lemo, - On order
BNC
I/O interface - Lemo - 8-pin
RS-232 - DSUB - 9-pin
External power supply - Lemo - 4-pin
VGA output Lemo 10-pins
Case - Plastic

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-18 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Stability against temperature change - - -
Amplitude %/10 C -5 0 5
Echo position %/10 C -1 0 1
Stability against voltage change - - -
Amplitude % -2 0 2
Time of flight % -1 0 1
Power supply - - - Li Ion Battery
6 NiMH cells
Battery operation time h - 14 - Li Ion Battery
3 6 NiMH cells
Stability after warm-up time - - - After 30 minutes
Low battery display - - - Statussymbol
Amplitude %/10 C -2 0 2 +/-0,5%
Time of flight % -1 0 1 +/- 0,5mm
Change in amplitude over time base position % - - -
with battery c
Types of Sockets
Probe connection - Lemo, - On order
BNC
I/O interface - Lemo - 8-pin
RS-232 - DSUB - 9-pin
External power supply - Lemo - 4-pin
VGA output Lemo 10-pins
Case - Plastic

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-18 GE Inspection Technologies


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Documentation - - - Technical reference
manual

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-19

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Documentation - - - Technical reference
manual

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-19


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Other
Software update procedure - - - Download via RS 232
Options - - - Data logger

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-20 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Description Symbol Dimension Min Average Max Comment
Other
Software update procedure - - - Download via RS 232
Options - - - Data logger

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-20 GE Inspection Technologies


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Picture: 1

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-21

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Picture: 1

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-21


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Picture: 2

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-22 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Picture: 2

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-22 GE Inspection Technologies


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Picture: 3

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-23

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Picture: 3

GE Inspection Technologies USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-23


Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1
Picture: 4

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-24 GE Inspection Technologies

Technical specifications according to EN 12668-1


Picture: 4

USM 35X S_TM036060001_D-24 GE Inspection Technologies